Download - 6C2001
Toc A-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
CONTENTS
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition
CS 1000/CS 3000Field Control Stations
PART-A Field Control StationA1. Control Station Overview ..................................................................... A1-1
A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part ..................................... A2-1A2.1 Configuration of PFCS/SFCS and Name of Each Part ................................ A2-2
A2.2 Configuration of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS and Name of Each Part ... A2-3
A2.3 Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet and Name of Each Part ......... A2-4
A2.4 Configuration of Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS and Name of Each Part .. A2-8
A2.5 Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet and Name of Each Part ........ A2-9
A2.6 Configuration of FFCS and Name of Each Part ......................................... A2-13
A3. Installation ............................................................................................ A3-1A3.1 Mounting a Rack Mountable Type Devices .................................................. A3-2
A3.1.1 Attaching the Brackets on a Nest .................................................... A3-5
A3.1.2 Installation of Rack Mountable Device ............................................ A3-7
A3.2 Installing LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS (with Cabinet) ............................... A3-10
A3.2.1 Maintenance Area ........................................................................ A3-11
A4. Cable Connections ............................................................................... A4-1A4.1 Power Supply Wiring ..................................................................................... A4-2
A4.1.1 Wiring of Cabinet Internal Power Cables ......................................... A4-3
A4.1.2 Power Calble Wiring of FFCS .......................................................... A4-4
A4.2 Grounding ..................................................................................................... A4-6
A4.2.1 Grounding of PFCD/SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS ......... A4-7
A4.2.2 Grounding of FFCS......................................................................... A4-8
A4.3 Connecting the Bus Cables .......................................................................... A4-9
A4.3.1 Connecting the PFCS/SFCS Bus Cable ........................................ A4-10
A4.3.2 Connecting the Bus Cables to LFCS2/LFCS ................................. A4-15
A4.3.3 Connecting the Bus Cables to KFCS2/KFCS ................................ A4-35
A4.3.4 Connecting Bus Cables to FFCS .................................................. A4-42
A4.4 V net Conversion ......................................................................................... A4-49
A4.5 Connecting a Cable to Contact Output ...................................................... A4-50
A5. Operations and Setups......................................................................... A5-1A5.1 Setting Up Units ............................................................................................ A5-2
A5.2 Turing On/Off the Power ............................................................................... A5-5
IM 33Q06C20-01E
Toc A-2
10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS ............................................................. A6-1A6.1 Functions of Each Unit in PFCS/SFCS ........................................................ A6-2
A6.1.1 Power Distribution Board of PFCS/SFCS ........................................ A6-3
A6.1.2 Power Supply Unit of PFCS/SFCS .................................................. A6-4
A6.1.3 Battery Unit of PFCS/SFCS ............................................................ A6-5
A6.1.4 Processor Card of PFCS/SFCS ...................................................... A6-6
A6.1.5 Control Bus Coupler Unit .............................................................. A6-10
A6.2 Functions of Each Unit in LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ............................. A6-11
A6.2.1 Power Distribution Board of Rack MountableLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ........................................................ A6-12
A6.2.2 Power Distribution Boards ofLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet .................................... A6-13
A6.2.3 RIO Bus Distribution Unit .............................................................. A6-18
A6.2.4 Power Unit in FCU ........................................................................ A6-19
A6.2.5 Battery Unit in FCU ....................................................................... A6-20
A6.2.6 Processor card in FCU.................................................................. A6-21
A6.2.7 RIO Bus Interface Card ................................................................. A6-25
A6.2.8 ESB Bus Interface Card ................................................................ A6-26
A6.2.9 V net Coupler Unit ........................................................................ A6-27
A6.2.10 RIO Bus Coupler Unit ................................................................... A6-29
A6.2.11 ESB Bus Coupler Unit ................................................................... A6-30
A6.2.12 External Interface Unit of Rack MountableLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ........................................................ A6-31
A6.2.13 External Interface Unit ofLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet .................................... A6-32
A6.2.14 Contact Output Unit ...................................................................... A6-33
A6.2.15 Fan Units ...................................................................................... A6-34
A6.2.16 ESB Bus Interface Master Module (with SOE Interface) ................ A6-35
A6.2.17 IRIG-B Coupler ............................................................................. A6-39
A6.3 Configuration and Functions of Each Unit in FFCS .................................. A6-40
A6.3.1 External Interface Unit .................................................................. A6-41
A6.3.2 Power Supply Module ................................................................... A6-42
A6.3.3 Processor Module ......................................................................... A6-43
A6.3.4 V net Coupler Unit ........................................................................ A6-49
A6.3.5 ESB Bus Coupler Module ............................................................. A6-50
A6.3.6 ESB Bus Interface Module (SB401) .............................................. A6-51
A6.3.7 ER Bus Interface Master Module (EB401) ..................................... A6-53
A6.3.8 ER Bus Interface Slave Module (EB501) ....................................... A6-54
A7. Maintenance of FCS ............................................................................. A7-1A7.1 Precautions for Maintenance ....................................................................... A7-2
A7.1.1 Precautions for Static Electricity ...................................................... A7-3
Toc A-3
IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
A7.2 Daily Maintenance......................................................................................... A7-4
A7.2.1 Inspection Using FCS Status Display Window ................................ A7-5
A7.2.2 Check of Status Indication Lamps : PFCS/SFCS ............................ A7-6
A7.2.3 Check of Status Indication Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ... A7-8
A7.2.4 Inspection by FFCS Status Display Window ................................. A7-10
A7.2.5 Inspection by FFCS Status Display LEDs ..................................... A7-11
A7.3 Replacing PFCS/SFCS Parts ...................................................................... A7-12
A7.3.1 Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure ................................. A7-13
A7.3.2 Processor Card Replacement Procedure ...................................... A7-15
A7.3.3 Control Bus Coupler Unit Replacement Procedure ....................... A7-17
A7.3.4 Battery Unit Replacement Procedure ............................................ A7-19
A7.3.5 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts Having DefinedLife Spans) ................................................................................... A7-22
A7.4 Replacing LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS Parts ............................................ A7-23
A7.4.1 Common Procedure for Replacing Cards and Units ...................... A7-24
A7.4.2 Replacing Cards or Units in Non-Redundant LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS ............................................................................... A7-25
A7.4.3 Replacing Cards or Units in Duplexed LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS ............................................................................... A7-27
A7.4.4 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts Having DefinedLife Spans) ................................................................................... A7-30
A7.5 Replacing FFCS Parts ................................................................................. A7-42
A7.5.1 Replacing Common Modules ........................................................ A7-43
A7.5.2 Exchange Node ............................................................................ A7-53
A7.5.3 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts Having DefinedLife Spans) ................................................................................... A7-56
A7.5.4 How to Replace Parts ................................................................... A7-57
Customer Maintenance Parts List (PFCS/SFCS) ............... CMPL 33Q06C30-31E
Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFS10/AFG10) ........... CMPL 33Q06C20-31E
Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFS20/AFG20) ........... CMPL 33Q06C21-31E
Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFS30/AFG30) ........... CMPL 33Q06N10-31E
Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFS40/AFG40) ........... CMPL 33Q06N20-31E
Customer Maintenance Parts List (AFF50) ........................ CMPL 33Q06N30-31E
Blank Page
Toc B-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
CONTENTS
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition
CS 1000/CS 3000Field Control Stations
PART-B CabinetsB1. Cabinet .................................................................................................. B1-1
B2. *** This section is blank. *** .................................................................. B2-1
B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41 .................................................................. B3-1B3.1 Installation of Node Inside ACB21/ACB41 ................................................... B3-2
B3.2 Installation and Wiring for ACB21/ACB41 .................................................... B3-3
B3.2.1 ACB21/ACB41 Maintenance Area .................................................. B3-4
B3.2.2 Installing an ACB21/ACB41 ............................................................ B3-5
B3.2.3 Wiring for ACB21/ACB41 ................................................................ B3-6
Customer Maintenance Parts List(Terminal Boards/Blocks, Relay Boards) ..................CMPL 33Y06K50-31E
Customer Maintenance Parts List (ACB41) ....................... CMPL 33Q06P10-31E
Blank Page
<A1. Control Station Overview> A1-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A1. Control Station OverviewIn the standard configuration, the main components of the PFCS/SFCS are two I/Omodule nests containing I/O modules for conversion of signals to and from the field.By adding an I/O expansion rack, a PFCS/SFCS can contain a total of five I/O modulenests.
There are two types of LFCS2/LFCS: the model installed in a cabinet and a rackmountable model. An LFCS2/LFCS is composed of nodes, I/O units, and the RIObus.
There are two types of KFCS2/KFCS: the model installed in a cabinet and a rackmountable model. An KFCS2/KFCS is composed of “Local Nodes”, “RemoteNodes”, and the ESB bus (Extended SB bus).
FFCS may be configured as a compact type field control unit with 3 I/O nodes.
SEE ALSO
For the details of hardware specifications, refer to General Specifications shown below.
• CENTUM CS 1000
PFCS/PFCD Field Control Station, Duplexed Field Control Station (GS 33S06C10-31E)
• CENTUM CS 3000
PFCS/PFCD Field Control Station, Duplexed Field Control Station (compact type)
(GS 33Q06C30-31E)
AFS10S, AFS10D, AFG10S, AFG10D
Field Control Unit (for RIO, 19” rack-mountable type)
Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, 19” rack-mountable type) (GS 33Q06C20-31E)
AFS20S, AFS20D, AFG20S, AFG20D
Field Control Unit (for RIO, with cabinet)
Duplexed Field Control Unit (for RIO, with cabinet) (GS 33Q06C21-31E)
AFS30S, AFS30D, AFG30S, AFG30D
Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” rack-mountable type)
Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” rack-mountable type) (GS 33Q06N10-31E)
AFS40S, AFS40D, AFG40S, AFG40D
Field Control Unit (for FIO, with cabinet)
Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, with cabinet) (GS 33Q06N20-31E)
AFF50S, AFF50D
Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” rack-mountable type)
Duplexed Field Control Unit (for FIO, 19” rack-mountable type) (GS 33Q06N05-31E)
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
Blank Page
<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of EachPartThe following describes the configuration of a PFCS, SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and FFCS the name of each part.
In addition, the control bus is referred to represent both V net and VL net.
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A2-2<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A2.1 Configuration of PFCS/SFCS and Name of EachPartThe figure below shows the maximum configuration of a PFCS/SFCS with an I/Oexpansion rack. The units composing a PFCS/SFCS are listed in the table below thefigure.
In PFCS/SFCS (non-redundant configuration), when each component requires onlyone unit, the units of the components should be installed on the left and the dummyplates should be put on the right.
■ Name of Each Part : PFCS/SFCS
A020101E.EPS
I/O modules
Power distribution board
Power supply units
Processor cards
Contact output unit
Battery units
Control bus coupler units Branch plugBranch plug
I/O Expansion rack
Bare nest
Figure Configuration and Name of Each Part : PFCS/SFCS
Table Units Composing and Model Name : PFCS/SFCS ¡ £
Unit or Card Name Single Configuration Duplexed Configuration
Power supply unit (100-120 V AC)
Power supply unit (220-240 V AC)
Power supply unit (24 V DC)
Processor card (standard (*1))
Processor card (enhanced (*1), compact type)
Battery unit
Control bus coupler unit
PW701
PW702
PW704
CP701
CP703
S9766UK
AIP521
1 or 2ps
1 or 2ps
1 or 2ps
1
1
1
1 or 2ps
2ps
2ps
2ps
2ps
2ps
2ps
2ps
A020102E.EPS
PW701
PW702
PW704
CP701
CP703
S9766UK
AIP521
Branch plug (for VL net or V net 10BASE-2 cable) S9764UK 1 or 2ps 2psS9764UK
Branch plug (for V net 10BASE-5 cable) S9628UK 2ps 2psS9628UK
Note *1 : ¡ For CS 1000, only standard type and enhanced type can be applied.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-3
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A2.2 Configuration of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCSand Name of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a rack mountable duplexed LFCS2/LFCS. For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right of the nestand dummy plate on the left.
■ Name of Each Part : LFCS2/LFCS £
A020201E.EPS
Power supply unitsRIO bus interface cardsProcessor cards
Nest
Battery unit
RIO bus coupler units
Fan units Air filter Power supply terminals
Power distribution board
External interface unit
Battery unit
V net coupler unit
Figure Configuration of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS and Name of Each Part : LFCS2/LFCS £
The type and number of the card to be installed in rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS vary withmodel name and specification code of LFCS2/LFCS.
SEE ALSO
For the units and cards composing an LFCS2/LFCS, see the following:
The table in Section A2.3, “Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinets and Name of Each Part”
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
A2-4<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A2.3 Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet andName of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a duplexed LFCS2/LFCS with cabinet.
For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right half of the nest anddummy plates on the left half.
■ Name of Each Part : LFCS2/LFCS £
A020301E.EPS
Front Side Rear
FCU
Power distribution boards for nests
RIO bus distribution unit RIO bus
distribution unit
Main power distribution board
Power distribution boards for nodes
FCU
Figure Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-5
IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
The figure below shows the configuration of the FCU of a duplexed LFCS2/LFCS with acabinet. For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right of the nest anddummy plate on the left.
A020302E.EPS
Power supply unitsRIO bus interface cardsProcessor cards
Battery unit
RIO bus coupler units
Fan units
External interface unit
Battery unit
Figure Configuration of FCU : LFCS2/LFCS £
The models and numbers of cards installed in the FCU in an LFCS2/LFCS with cabinetdiffer depending on the model and suffix code of the LFCS2/LFCS as shown in the tablebelow.
Table Cards and Unit Name and Model : LFCS2/LFCS £
Model Field Control UnitDuplexed Field
Control Unit
Card/UnitAFS10S, AFS20SAFG10S, AFG20S
AFS10D, AFS20DAFG10D, AFG20D
Power supply unit (100-120 V AC)
Power supply unit (220-240 V AC)
Power supply unit (24 V DC)
Processor card
RIO bus interface card
V net coupler unit
RIO bus coupler unit
PW301
PW302
PW304
CP345
RB301
AIP501
AIP511
2ps
2ps
2ps
2ps
2ps
2ps
2ps
PW301
PW302
PW304
CP345
RB301
AIP502
AIP512
A020303E.EPS
1
1
1
1
1
2ps
1 or 2ps
A2-6<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
■ Internal Power Distribution : LFCS2/LFCS £
● Single Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS £
A020304E.EPS
CN1 (NIU1)
CN2 (NIU2)
CN3 (NIU3)
L N L N
CN1 (NIU1)
CN2 (NIU2)
CN3 (NIU3)
CN1 (FCU)
CN2 (NIU1)
CN3 (NIU2)
CN4 (NIU3)
L N
CN1 (FCU)
CN2 (NIU1)
CN3 (NIU2)
CN4 (NIU3)
L N
L
N1
L
N2
L
N3
The numbers on the cable markers correspond to the terminal numbers.
LFCS2/LFCS Front LFCS2/LFCS Rear
Rear RightRear Left
Front RightFront Left
TM2 AC OUT
Figure Power Distribution Diagram for Single Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS £
<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-7
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
● Dual Lines of Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS £
A020305E.EPS
CN1 (NIU1)
CN2 (NIU2)
CN3 (NIU3)
L N L N
CN1 (NIU1)
CN2 (NIU2)
CN3 (NIU3)
CN1 (FCU)
CN2 (NIU1)
CN3 (NIU2)
CN4 (NIU3)
L N
CN1 (FCU)
CN2 (NIU1)
CN3 (NIU2)
CN4 (NIU3)
L N
TM2 AC OUT
L
N1
L
N2
L
N3
TM2 AC OUT
L
N1
L
N2
L
N3
The numbers on the cable markers correspond to the terminal numbers. The marks, “R” and “L”, indicate the right side from the front, and the left side from the front, respectively.
LFCS2/LFCS Front LFCS2/LFCS Rear
Rear RightRear Left
Front RightFront Left
Figure Power Distribution Diagram for Dual Lines of Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS £
A2-8<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A2.4 Configuration of Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCSand Name of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a rack mountable duplexed KFCS2/KFCS. For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right half of thenest and dummy plates on the left half.
■ Name of Each Part : KFCS2/KFCS £
A020401E.EPS
Power supply unitsESB bus interface cardsProcessor cards
Battery unit
ESB bus coupler units
Fan units Air filter Power supply terminals
Power distribution board
External interface unit
Battery unit
V net coupler unit
Nest
Figure Configuration of Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS and Name of Each Part : KFCS2/KFCS£
The type and number of the card to be installed in rack mountable KFCS2/KFCS vary withmodel name and specification code of KFCS2/KFCS.
SEE ALSO
For the units and cards composing an KFCS2/KFCS, see the following:
The table in Section A2.5, “Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinets and Name of Each Part”
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-9
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A2.5 Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet andName of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a duplexed KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet.
For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right half of the nest anddummy plates on the left half.
■ Name of Each Part : KFCS2/KFCS £
Front Side RearFCU
FCUpower distribution board
Main power distribution board
Distribution unit Distribution
unit
A020501E.EPS
Figure Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet : KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A2-10<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
The figure below shows the configuration of the FCU of a duplexed KFCS2/KFCS with acabinet. For a single CPU model, cards and units are installed in the right of the nest anddummy plate on the left.
A020502E.EPS
Power supply unitsESB bus interface cards orESB bus interface master modules(*1)
Processor cards
Battery unit
ESB bus coupler units
Fan units IRIG-B coupler(*1)
External interface unit
Battery unit
*1: for SOE time synchronizationFigure Configuration of FCU : KFCS2/KFCS £
The models and numbers of cards installed in the FCU in an KFCS2/KFCS with cabinetdiffer depending on the model and suffix code of the KFCS2/KFCS as shown in the tablebelow.
Table Cards and Unit Name and Model : KFCS2/KFCS £
Model Field Control Unit Duplexed Field Control Unit
Card/Unit AFS30S, AFS40SAFG30S, AFG40S
AFS30D, AFS40DAFG30D, AFG40D
Power supply unit (100-120 V AC) PW301 1ps PW301 2ps
Power supply unit (220-240 V AC) PW302 1ps PW302 2ps
Power supply unit (24 V DC) PW304 1ps PW304 2ps
Processor card CP345 1ps CP345 2ps
ESB bus interface card SB301 1ps SB301 2ps
ESB bus interface master module(*1)
IRIG-B coupler(*1)
SB311 2ps
S9039FA 1ps
V net coupler unit AIP501 2ps AIP502 2ps
ESB bus coupler unit AIP532 1 or 2ps AIP532 2ps
A020503E.EPS
*1: for SOE time synchronization
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-11
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Internal Power Distribution : KFCS2/KFCS £
● Single Power Supply : KFCS2/KFCS £
A020504E.EPS
L
N1
L
N2
L
N3
The numbers on the cable markers correspond to the terminal numbers.
CN1(FCU-L)
CN1(FCU-R)
FCU PDB
Front power distribution board
Rear power distribution board
KFCS2/KFCS front KFCS2/KFCS rear
TM2 AC OUT
Figure Power Distribution Diagram for Single Power Supply : KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A2-12<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Dual Lines of Power Supply : KFCS2/KFCS £
A020505E.EPS
L
N1
L
N2
L
N3
The numbers on the cable markers correspond to the terminal numbers.
CN1(FCU-L)
CN1(FCU-R)
L
N1
L
N2
L
N3
FCU PDB
Front power distribution board
Rear power distribution board
KFCS2/KFCS front KFCS2/KFCS rear
TM2 AC OUTTM2 AC OUT
Figure Power Distribution Diagram for Dual Lines of Power Supply : KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part> A2-13
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A2.6 Configuration of FFCS and Name of Each PartThe figure below shows the configuration of a control system with FFCS.
■ Configuration of a Control System with FFCS : FFCS £
A020601E.EPS
AFF50D
Engineering Operation & Monitoring
ANB10D
HIS : Human Interface StationAFF50D : Field Control UnitANB10D : ESB Bus Node Unit (Local Node)ANR10D : ER Bus Node Unit (Remote Node)
V net
HISHIS
ESB Bus
ANB10D
ESB Bus
ANR10D
ER BusSB401
EB501
Restrictions on Node Units • ESB Bus : Total length should be less than 10 meters • ER Bus : Total length should be less than 185 meters if via YCB141 or less than 500 meters if adapted through YCB311. • Number of Nodes : Up to 3 (including both ESB bus nodes and ER bus nodes).
SB401
EC401
EB401
Figure Configuration of a Control System with FFCS : FFCS £
● Restrictions on I/O Module Installation : FFCS £
The number of I/O modules can be installed in FFCS is restricted accordingly.
SEE ALSO
For more information about I/O module connection cables and maintenance, see the following:
Input & Output Modules (IM 33Y06K01-01E)
For more information about restrictions on I/O module installation, see the following:
General Specification "FIO System Overview" (GS 33Q06Q01-31E)
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-01
A2-14<A2. Configuration of FCS and Name of Each Part>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Configuration of Field Control Unit : FFCS £The figure below shows the configuration of a duplexed field control unit. For a non-redun-dant configuration model, a power supply module and a processor module are installed inthe left side slot and dummy plates on the right side slot.
A020602E.EPS
Processor module
External interface unitV net coupler unit
Power supply moduleInput/Output moduleor bus interface module
Utility unit
Base unit
Cable tray
CN2(CPU-L)
CN3(CPU-R)
CN1 ENBL
DSBL
CN2(CPU-L)
CN3(CPU-R)
TM1READY
FUSE RL1
CN1 ENBL
DSBL
CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC , L N
CN2 (PSU-R)
Figure Configuration of Field Control Unit : FFCS £
The type and number of the module to be installed in AFF50S/AFF50D vary with modelname and specification code of AFF50S/AFF50D.
● Configuration of a Control System with FFCS : FFCS £
Table Model Names of Field Control Unit Components : FFCS £
NameAFF50S AFF50D
Power supply module (100-120 V AC) PW481 1 or 2ps PW481 2ps
Power supply module (220-240 V AC) PW482 1 or 2ps PW482 2ps
Power supply module (24 V DC) PW484 1 or 2ps PW484 2ps
Processor module CP401 1 CP401 2ps
External interface unit 1 1
ER bus interface slave module (*3) EB501 1 or 2ps EB501 2ps
A020603E.EPS
V net coupler unit AIP504 2ps AIP504 2ps
ESB bus coupler module (*4) EC401 1 or 2ps EC401 2ps
ESB bus interface module (*1) SB401 1 or 2ps SB401 2ps
ER bus interface master module (*2) EB401 1 or 2ps EB401 2ps
Duplexed Field Control UnitField Control Unit
*1: Installed in ESB bus node unit (local node)*2: Installed in ESB bus node unit (local node) or field control unit*3: Installed in ER bus node unit (remote node)*4: Installed to FFCS when connecting with ESB bus node unit (local node)
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A3. Installation> A3-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A3. InstallationChapter A3 outlines how to install a Field Control Station.
For further details, see the following documents.
SEE ALSO
For further details of installation, see the following :
CENTUM CS 1000 Installation Guidance, TI 33S01J10-01E
CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance, TI 33Q01J10-01E
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A3-2<A3. Installation>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A3.1 Mounting a Rack Mountable Type DevicesRegarding the rack mountable devices, the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS rack mount-able field control unit, FFCS rack mountable field control unit, PFCS/SFCS fieldcontrol station and PRK71 I/O expansion rack are concerned.
CAUTION
• If a device is a rack mountable type, the device should be mounted on a rack and putin a metal cabinet with a lock.
• When mounting a Field control unit and another equipment (such as a YNT: busrepeater) in the same rack, allow a space of at least 3 units (1 unit: 44.45 mm). Do notmount the devices too close to each other.However, when using the PRK71, do not leave a space between it and the PFCS/SFCS.
• When installing a total of two or more LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, ABC11S,ABC11D, and ACG10S in the same rack, ensure a space of at least 3 units (1 unit:44.45 mm) between each one.
A030101E.EPS
Figure PFCS and PRK71 Mounted on Rack : PFCS/SFCS
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
<A3. Installation> A3-3
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A030102E.EPS
Figure AFS10D/AFG10D Mounted on Rack : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
A030103E.EPS
Figure AFF50D Mounted on Rack : FFCS £
■ Provision of Space for Heat RadiationBe sure to allow space for radiation of heat at the top and bottom of the equipment.
• If the equipment is installed inside an instrument panel which has a closed top, installthe equipment at least 100 mm away from the top, and open an exhaust hole of atleast 200 cm2 or install an exhaust fan.
• Ensure a space of at least 50 mm between the back of the equipment and the rearpanel of the cabinet or the wall of the room.
■ Provision of Maintenance SpacesBe sure to allow spaces for maintenance.
• All cables for units and I/O modules are connected to the front.
• Checking the indicator lamp, setting, inspection, removal, and insertion of the cardsare performed in the front.
• Adequate space is required for suction and exhaust of the cooling fan of equipment.
• Ensure a space of at least 1000 mm in front of the equipment for wiring and mainte-nance.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A3-4<A3. Installation>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Rack Mounting Space : PFCS/SFCS, FFCS
A030104E.EPS
Top panel
Front
Maintenance area
Do not stack instruments without space.
Fan or Outlet ; Vent Opening > 200cm2
Min. 50 mm
Min. 3 units
Min. 100 mm
Min. 1000 mm
Figure Rack Mounting Space : PFCS/SFCS, FFCS
● Rack Mounting Space : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
A030105E.EPS
Top panel
Front
Do not stack instruments without space.
Maintenance area
Fan or Outlet ; Vent Opening > 200cm2
Min. 50 mm
Min. 1000 mm
Min. 3 units
Min. 3 units
Min. 100 mm
Figure Rack Mounting Space : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
<A3. Installation> A3-5
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A3.1.1 Attaching the Brackets on a NestYou can choose the positions in the nest at which to attach the rack mounting brack-ets in consideration of maintenance space in front of the equipments as well as thedepth of the rack.
■ Attaching Brackets : PFCS/SFCSWhen a PFCS/SFCS is delivered without being installed in an enclosure or rack, the rackmounting brackets come with the PFCS/SFCS.
Attach the brackets on both sides of the nest. Bracket can be attached in two ways. Whenusing the PRK71 expansion rack, attach the brackets at the same positions in the expan-sion rack.
The figure below shows the positions at which the brackets are to be attached.
A030106E.EPS
*228*255
I/O Expansion rack
Nest
Insulation bushing
Bracket
The measurements marked with*are references for mounting the brackets.
Unit: mm
Choose either position to install the bracket.
Bracket
Front
Front
Figure Positions at which Brackets are to be Attached : PFCS/SFCS
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A3-6<A3. Installation>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
■ Attaching Brackets : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £When a rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS is delivered without being installed inan enclosure or rack, the rack mounting brackets would be attached at the positions 162mm from the front panel. As shown in the figure below, you can choose the position fromthree different depths. Nevertheless, the position for the bracket of AFS30S and AFS30Dshould be 168 mm.
To change the bracket positions, detach and re-attach the brackets on both sides of theLFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS in reference to the figure below before installing the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS inside an instrument panel or mounting on a rack. Clip an isolationbushing on each side of the bracket mounting hole for isolation.
The figure below shows the bracket positions.
A030107E.EPS
• Choose one from the three positions to install the bracket. The measurments marked with* are references for mounting the brackets.
Unit: mm
Isolation bushing
Isolation bushing
Bracket
Clip an isolation bushing on each side of the bracket mounting hole for isolation.
Front
Rear
*22
*162 *168
*262
Figure Positions at which Brackets are to be Attached : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
SEE ALSO
For how to attach the isolation bushings, see the following:
A3.1.2, “Installation of Rack Mountable Device”
<A3. Installation> A3-7
IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
A3.1.2 Installation of Rack Mountable DeviceThis section describes how to install a PFCS/SFCS and a rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, FFCS on a rack or in an instrument panel, its precautions, andhow to install the I/O expansion rack.
WARNING
A rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, FFCS weighs nearly 25 kg, a PFCS/SFCSwith two I/O module nests weights nearly 18 kg. An I/O expansion rack with 3 module nestsweights nearly 8 kg. A sufficient work space for installation should be ensured and theequipment should be installed by several persons with attention to safety.
Observe the following when you install a rack mountable device on a rack or an instrumentpanel.
● Isolation from the Rack
Isolate the rack mountable FCS from the rack by attaching isolation bushings. Fasten a pairof isolation bushings together to each of the screw holes on the plate or the bracket on theFCS to prevent the FCS from touching the rack. And then screw the FCS to the rack. Afterscrewing the FCS to the rack, confirm that the FCS is electrically isolated. Isolation bush-ings are supplied with the rack mountable FCS.
WARNING
When you install the ‘FCS with isolation bushings attached’ on a rack or an instrumentpanel, do not keep the FCS hung on loose screws in an unstable status. Too much forcemay apply to the isolation bushings and cause damaged or broken isolation bushings.
A3-8<A3. Installation>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Installation Procedure
1. Fasten a pair of isolation bushings together to each of the screw holes on the plate orthe bracket on the FCS. The tapering end of the isolation bushings must come to thefront side where a screw enters.
2. Using eight M5 screws to fix the device onto the rack or the panel.
A030108E.EPS
Input/output module slots
Power supply module
Processor module
Cable tray
Using grounding terminal to connect the base unit to earth (less than 100 ohm). Make the grounding cable to pass throughthe tray and pull it down along the right side of the racks.
M5 screws (8 pieces)
M5 screws
Attach isolation to both sides of the plate.
● How to install isolation bushings
Rack
Rack
Isolation bushing(with a tapering)
Isolation bushing
Plate(front)
Isolation bushings (8 pieces)
Plate
Base unit
Figure Example of Mounting FFCS on a Rack : FFCS £
IMPORTANT
• Since the Field Control Unit (rack mountable type for FIO) does not have powerswitch, in order to turn the power supply on or off, it is recommended to use theexternal switch or breaker to turn on or off.
• If multiple node units exist, all the units should be grounded by connecting to the earthterminal (less than 100 ohm) separately.
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
<A3. Installation> A3-9
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Installing the I/O Extension Rack : PFCS/SFCSThe PFCS/SFCS comprises a common part and two I/O module nests, putting them on anI/O extension rack, three more I/O module nests can be installed. The I/O expansion rackand the PFCS/SFCS unit are always used as a pair.
● Installation Procedure
• Hook the I/O extension rack on the clicks provided on the PFCS/SFCS unit.
• Tentatively tighten the I/O extension rack to the 19-inch rack.
• Install the I/O extension rack by using the guide pins located on the back bottom of theI/O module nest as positioning marks.
• Securely tighten the I/O extension rack to the 19-inch rack.
• Connect the PFCS/SFCS and the I/O extension rack using shield bars (see figurebelow).
When installing the I/O extension rack on the rack, ensure insulation from the rack usinginsulation bushings and following the same procedure used for insulating the PFCS/SFCS.
Power to the I/O module nests installed on the I/O extension side is supplied from theconnector on the upper PFCS/SFCS back board.
There is no electrical circuit or back board on the I/O extension rack side.
The figure shows an example of the I/O extension rack and PFCS/SFCS installation.
A030109E.EPS
I/O expansion rack Hooks
Shield bar
Clicks
Figure Example of the I/O Expansion Rack Installation : PFCS/SFCS
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
A3-10<A3. Installation>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A3.2 Installing LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS (withCabinet)This section outlines the procedure and precautions for installation LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet.
CAUTION
LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet weighs nearly 400 kg with node. Ensure thatthere is sufficient work space for installation and install the equipment with several personswith attention to safety.
SEE ALSO
For the installation of the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS (with cabinet),see the following :
CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance (TI 33Q01J10-01E)
<A3. Installation> A3-11
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A3.2.1 Maintenance AreaFor a cabinet type field control station of LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS, the FCU isinstalled in the front-upper part of the cabinet and the main power distribution boardis installed in the front-lower part of the cabinet. All the I/O nodes are installed in therear part of the cabinet according to the specifications. When positioning the cabi-net type field control station of LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS, the sufficient spacefor maintenance should be reserved.
■ Securing the maintenance area £When selecting the installation place of the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, secure a suffi-cient maintenance area. The reasons for securing the maintenance area are as follows :
• For normal operation
• For the space necessary for air supply and exhaust of the unit air-cooling fan.
• For the periodical inspection to run the unit stably
• For repairing the unit in the case of failure
Figure below shows the maintenance area required for the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS.Consider this maintenance area when determining the size of the room in which to installthe LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS.
1000
Unit: mm
800
1000
650
L+50
F
External Dimension
1 2 3 4
600 1200 1800 2400L
2 4 6 8d
(note): Cabinets can be positioned side-by-side. "d" refers to the allowable deviation from the external dimensions when positioned side-by-side.
Numberof
Cabinets
A030201E.EPS
Figure Maintenance Area : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
Blank Page
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4. Cable ConnectionsChapter A4 outlines the methods for power supply wiring, grounding, connectingbus cables to an FCS which has already been installed.
SEE ALSO
For details on power supply cable connection, earth connection and filed wiring path, see the following:
CENTUM CS 1000 Installation Guidance, TI 33S01J10-01E
CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance, TI 33Q01J10-01E
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A4-2<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.1 Power Supply WiringThe following cautions should be noticed when connecting the power supply cableto the cabinet.
CAUTION
• Wire the power cable through the conduit at the desk entrance for the following rea-sons:
• To prevent damage to the cable due to contact with a metal plate.
• To avoid applying excessive weight on the solderless lugs or power connectionterminals due to the weight of the cable.
• Turn off the main power supply, and perform work after confirming with a tester thatthere is no power in the power cable to be connected.
• After the power cable has been connected, turn on the power to the power cable withthe breaker in the power panel turned OFF. Then, confirm with a tester that normalpower is being supplied to the power connection terminal.
• Wire the power cable so that a distance of 1 cm or more is maintained from othersignal lines.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-3
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.1.1 Wiring of Cabinet Internal Power Supply Cables
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the connector is firmly inserted to the position.
SEE ALSO
For more information about wiring of cabinet internal power supply cables, see the following:
“■ Internal Power Distribution : LFCS2/LFCS £” in A2.3 “Configuration of LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinetand Name of Each Part”
“■ Internal Power Distribution : KFCS2/KFCS £” in A2.5 “Configuration of KFCS2/KFCS with Cabi-net and Name of Each Part”
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-4<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4.1.2 Power Supply Cable Wiring of FFCSThis section describes how to power cable wiring a FFCS.
IMPORTANT
It is recommended to use a switch or breaker in the power supply, so that the power supplycan be turned on/off for individual FFCS at maintenance.
■ Connecting Power Cable : FFCS £The terminals for connecting power cables are illustrated as follows.
Use the M4 screws to connect the wires to the power supply input terminals on the externalinterface unit (TM2).
A040101E.EPS
Power supply input terminal (TM2)
TM1READY
FUSE RL1 CN1 (PSU-L)
CN2 (PSU-R)
Power supply connectors for power supply moduleCN1 : Left side power supply moduleCN2 : Right side power supply module
N
LTM2 100-120V AC � L N
Power supply input terminal (AC)
Power supply input terminal (24V DC)�
�
Figure External Interface Unit and Power Supply Terminal : FFCS £
When wiring the power supply cables, follow the procedure below.
1. Cut the end of the cable and install a crimp terminal (round shape) for M4 screw.
2. Remove the protective cover from the TM2 terminals on the external interface unit.
3. Connect the non-grounding side to the terminal L and the grounding side to theterminal N (using M4 screws).
4. Put the protective cover back to the external interface unit.
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-5
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
■ Connecting Power Cable : FFCS £A power supply module is provided with an approximately 1-meter long power cable with aconnector on one side.
This power cable should be connected as follows:
• The cable of the power supply module on the left side should be connected to CN1(PSU-L) on the external interface unit.
• The cable of the power supply module on the right side should be connected to CN2(PSU-R) on the external interface unit.
If only a single power supply module is used, the right side is covered with a dummy plate.
A040102E.EPS
Front view of power supply module Side view of power supply module
LN
Power supply input terminal
Grounding terminal
Figure Power Supply Cable Connection : FFCS £
A4-6<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.2 GroundingBe sure to ground the equipment in order to avoid the electric shock of the operatorand maintenance engineers and to prevent the influence of external noise.
CAUTION
When grounding the equipment, connect the grounding cable to the designated protectivegrounding terminal.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-7
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.2.1 Grounding of PFCD/SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCSWhen grounding the PFCD/SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS the followingconditions are required.
• The grounding resistance must be 100 ohm or less.
• For the grounding bus, use a 22 mm2 cable or thicker.
• The grounding bar for connecting grounding cables is at the bottom front of the cabi-net and is not isolated from the FCU.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-8<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.2.2 Grounding of FFCSTo prevent from the external noises, the FFCS must be grounded.
■ Wiring : FFCS £Use the grounding terminal on the base unit for wiring the grounding cables.
Pull down the grounding cable through the tray from the right side of the rack.
• The grounding resistance must be 100 ohm or less.
• The wire for grounding should be about 2 mm2 thick.
A040201E.EPS
Field control unit
CN2(CPU-L)
CN3(CPU-R)
CN1 ENBL
DSBL
CN2(CPU-L)
CN3(CPU-R)
TM1READY
FUSE RL1
CN1 ENBL
DSBL
CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC � L N
CN2 (PSU-R)
Grounding terminal
Cable tray
Grounding wire
Figure Ground Wiring : FFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-9
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.3 Connecting the Bus CablesThis section describes the connections of the VL net, V net, RIO bus, ESB bus andER bus cables .
Hereinafter, the control bus is referred to represent both V net and VL net.
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A4-10<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.3.1 Connecting the PFCS/SFCS Bus CableThis chapter describes how to connect cables of control bus (VL net, V net) to PFCS/SFCS via connector assembly and the method of cable connection, as well as theconnection between V net and VL net.
WARNING
When wiring the bus cable for control bus, note the following:
• Always connect “Bus 1 to Bus 1” and “Bus 2 to Bus 2” when connecting the PC toPFCS/SFCS. Do not connect “Bus 1 to Bus 2” and “Bus 2 to Bus 1.”
• When the control bus connection becomes an end terminal for the station, install acontrol bus terminator on the unwired connection port of the control bus branch plug.
■ Bus Cable Connection : PFCS ¡• PFCS is connected to other stations via VL net cables. VL net is in either single con-
figuration or dual-redundant configuration.
■ Bus Cable Connection : PFCS/SFCS ¡ £• SFCS is connected to other stations via V net cables. V net is in dual-redundant
configuration.
• PFCS is connected to other stations via V net cables. V net is in either single configu-ration or dual-redundant configuration.
A040301E.EPS
To the next device. If this is an end terminal, install a terminator.From other devices
Bus 2 Bus 2
Bus 1 Bus 1
Figure Connecting the Control Bus Cable : PFCS/SFCS
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-11
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Connection Between V net Cable and VL net Cable ¡V net cable and VL net cable can be connected via the control bus adapter (YCB147) orcontrol bus converter unit (YCB149).
However, the weight and the strength of the cables are various, the control bus adapterneeds to be fixed firmly.
• The V net cable should be fixed somewhere close to the control bus adapter, so thatthe VL net cable will not be stressed by the weight of the V net cable.
• To fix the control bus adapter somewhere near FCS or HIS above the floor level so asto make maintenance convenient.
• Do not fix the control bus adapter to the place where people may pass by.
An example of control bus adapter installation is shown below.
V net cables
PFCS
Under floor level
A040302E.EPS
VL net cable
VL net branch connector
Control bus adapter
Fixed
Figure An example of fixing the control bus adapter ¡
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-12<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Wiring the Control Bus : PFCS/SFCS
WARNING
When disconnecting a PFCS or SFCS from the control bus, the following cautions shouldbe noted.
When removing the PFCS/SFCS from control bus while the system is in operation, first tiltthe switch on the control bus coupler unit toward the DSBL side, then remove the entirecontrol bus connector assembly from the control bus coupler unit.
● How to Connect the Control Bus Cable : PFCS/SFCS ¡ £
After tilting the switch on the control bus coupler unit toward the DSBL side, connect twocontrol bus cables to Coupler Bus 1 and Coupler Bus 2 of the PFCS control bus coupler unit.
1. Turn the control bus coupler unit into DSBL position.
2. Remove the connector assembly (the part to which control bus cables are connected)from the control bus coupler unit. Loosen the two connector assembly mountingscrews located on the right and left (A), and pull the connector assembly forward toremove it. (Depth: 60 mm)
3. Loosen the screw located on the top of the connector assembly cable cover (B), anddisassemble the assembly as shown in the figure. The cable cover and branch plugcan be disassembled into three parts, by vertically sliding the top and bottom parts ofthe cable cover.
CN
1
CN
2
ENBL
DSBLRCV
SND
R
SND
L
BUS1
Connector assemblyA040303E.EPS
Branch connector
B ScrewA Screws
BNC type connector(N type connector is for V net cables)
Figure Control Bus Coupler Unit : PFCS/SFCS
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-13
IM 33Q06C20-01E
4. Connect bus cables to branch plug.
The branch plug for connecting VL net cables is BNC type (*1).
The branch plug for connecting V net cables (10BASE-2) is BNC type.
The branch plug for connecting V net cables (10BASE-5) is N type.
5. When the unit is the end of the connection, be sure to install a terminator on theconnector to which the control bus cable is not connected so that appropriate electri-cal characteristics are maintained.
Model of terminator for VL net: YCB148(*1)
Model of V net cables (10BASE-2): YCB148
Model of V net cables (10BASE-5): YCB118
A040304E.EPS
Cable cover
Cable cover
Control bus cables
(If the unit is the end of control bus connection, install a control bus terminator.)
Control bus terminator
Figure Connecting the Control Bus Cable : PFCS/SFCS ¡ £
6. To prevent the cables from tensions, the bending radius of the cables should begreater than the following given values:
VL net cable bending radius: 50mm (*1)
V net cable (10BASE-2) bending radius: 50mm
V net cable (10BASE-5) bending radius: 100mm*1: ¡ Can only be applied to CS 1000
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-14<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Installing the Connector Assembly : PFCS/SFCS
When control bus cables have been connected, install the connector assembly to thecontrol bus coupler unit by following the steps below:
1. Align the groove on the control bus branch plug, to which control bus cables areconnected, with the rail on the cable cover (bottom part). Slide the rail into the grooveby pushing the branch plug and the cover from both sides.
2. Similarly, align the rail on the cable cover (top part) with the groove on the control busbranch connector, by sandwiching the control bus cables between them.
3. Tighten the screw on the top of the cable cover. The connector assembly has beenassembled.
A040305E.EPS
Screw
Cable cover(top part)
Control bus cables
The groove on the controlbus branch connector
Rail (both sides)
Cable cover(bottom part)
Figure Connecting the Branch Plug and the Cable Cover : PFCS/SFCS
4. Align the right and left guide rails on the control bus coupler unit with the rails on theconnector assembly, and push the assembly into the unit until it stops. The connectorassembly and the control bus coupler are connected by the connector.
5. Fix the connector assembly to the control bus coupler unit by tightening two mountingscrews, one on the right and one the left.
A040306E.EPS
Control bus coupler unit
Guide rail (both sides)
Mounting screw
Mounting screw
Connector assembly
Control bus cables
Rail (both sides)
Figure Connecting the Control Bus Coupler Unit and the Connector Assembly : PFCS/SFCS
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-15
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.3.2 Connecting the Bus Cables to LFCS2/LFCSThis section explains the wiring of V net and RIO bus to LFCS2/LFCS.
As for V net; how to connect coupler unit and connector assembly with the V netcables, how to attach the clamp filter to the V net cables, and how to modify the V netconnection.
As for RIO bus cables, how to connect the cables to the RIO bus terminals and howto grounding the RIO bus cables will be explaines below.
WARNING
When connecting a HIS or SFCS and LFCS2/LFCS, or an LFCS2/LFCS and conversionconnector box, etc. using the V net, be careful about the following:
• Connect Bus 1 to Bus 1 and Bus 2 to Bus 2. Do not connect Bus 1 to Bus 2, or Bus 2to Bus 1.
• For each of the stations at both ends of the V net, install the V net terminator at theopened port of the V net connector unit.
• The number of adaptive connector boxes and the distance from the cable as well asthe number of stations are limited. When the numbers exceeds the limitation, busrepeater should be used instead of adaptive connector.
SEE ALSO
For details on the limitation mentioned above, refer the system specification (GS 33Q01B10-01E) forCENTUM CS 3000 distribution production control system.
WARNING
• Disconnection of LFCS2/LFCS from V net
When disconnecting an LFCS2/LFCS from the V net while the system is running,make sure you detach the V net connector assembly rather than disconnecting the Vnet cable only.
Leave the cable attached on the V net connector assembly.
Detaching the V net cable from the V net connector assembly will break the V netcommunication and cause a network error, and also affect the communication ofother stations on the network.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-16<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Bus Cable Connection : LFCS2/LFCS £
● Example of Connection of V net and RIO Bus : LFCS2/LFCS £
The figure below shows the connection human interface station (HIS) or generic PC, whichare both referred to as “HIS” hereafter, as a generic name, to LFCS2/LFCS with V net andconnection of LFCS2/LFCS and nodes with RIO bus.
RIO bus
Modem
V net
: Terminator
Control busAdapter
HIS(PC)
HIS(PC)
FCU ofLFCS2/LFCS
A040307E.EPS
Ethernet
HIS
Node Node Node
Control busAdapter
Figure V net and RIO Bus : LFCS2/LFCS £
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-17
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Example of Connection of V net Cables (10BASE-5) : LFCS2/LFCS £
The figure below shows the connection SFCS to AFG10D with V net cable (10BASE-5).
A040308E.EPS
V net coupler (for Bus 2)
V net coupler (for Bus 2)
Clamp filters
To next unit (Install a terminator if this is an end.)
V net coupler (for Bus 1)
V net coupler (for Bus 1)
V net cables (10BASE-5)
AFG10D
PFCD (Compact FCS)
Bus 1 Bus 2
Figure Example of Connection of V net Cables (10BASE-5) : LFCS2/LFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-18<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Example of Connection of V net Cables (10BASE-5 to 10BASE-2) : LFCS2/LFCS £
V net Cable Connection (10BASE-2 and 10BASE-5): LFCS2/LFCS
The following figure illustrates how to use adapter YCB147 to connect V net 10BASE-5cable to V net 10BASE-2 cable.
A040309E.EPS
Control busadapter
YCB147
PRINTERRS232C-A
(COM2)
E X TRS232C-B
(COM1)SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 SLOT6 SLOT7
V net coupler (for Bus 2)
Clamp filters
V net coupler (for Bus 1)
V net cables (10BASE-5)
V net cables (10BASE-2)
Clamp filters
AFS10D/AFG10D
Bus 1 Bus 2
V net
HIS
Figure Example of Connection of V net Cables (10BASE-5 to 10BASE-2) : LFCS2/LFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-19
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Connecting the V net Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £Follow the procedure below to connect two V net cables to two ports (buses 1 and 2) of therightmost V net coupler unit in the FCU.
1. Loosen the two attaching screws at the top and bottom of the connector assembly.(See the figure below.) Then pull to detach the connector assembly (60 mm depth)from the V net coupler unit.
2. Loosen the screw on the right cable cover of the connector assembly and disas-semble the connector assembly as shown in the figure. Slide to separate the cablecovers sideways for easy disassembly.
3. Connect the V net cables to the connector unit.Do not bend the cables at a bending radius of less than 100 mm.
4. If the V net connection ends at this station, make sure you install a terminator at theunused connector in order to match the electrical characteristics. (See the figure onthe next page.)
Terminator for V net cable (10BASE-5) :Model YCB118
Terminator for V net cable (10BASE-2) :Model YCB148
RCV
SND-L
SND-R
ENEL
DSEL
V Net
CN1
CN2
A040310E.EPS
Cable cover
Cable cover
Coupler unit
Connector assemblyUnit attaching screw
Coupler unit attaching screw
Connector assembly
Connector assembly attaching screw
Connector assembly attaching screw
V net connector unit
N-type connector
Figure V net Coupler Unit and Connector Assembly : LFCS2/LFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-20<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A040311E.EPS
Cable cover
Cable cover
V net branch plug cable cover
V net branch plug cable cover
V net cables
Plug the unused connector with a V net terminator at both ends of the V net connection.
V net terminator
Figure V net Cable Connection and Terminator : LFCS2/LFCS £
■ Replacing the Connector Assembly : LFCS2/LFCS £After connecting the V net cable(s), follow the procedure below to replace the connectorassembly on the V net coupler unit.
1. Slide the V net connector unit with the cable(s) into the left cable cover up to thecenter of the connector unit, while fitting the rail of the cable cover into the slot of the Vnet connector unit.
2. In the same manner, while fitting the rail of the right cable cover into the slot of the Vnet connector unit, put the V net cables between the cable covers.
3. Tighten the screw on the right cable cover at the torque of approximately 0.6 N•m.This completes the re-assembly of the connector assembly.
4. Mate the rails on the connector assembly unit with the top and bottom guide rails onthe V net coupler unit, and then push the connector assembly into the bottom. Theconnector assembly and V net coupler unit are connected by the V net connector unit.
5. Tighten the attaching screws at the top and bottom of the connector assembly at thetorque of approximately 0.25 N•m to fix the assembly to the coupler unit.
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-21
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Attaching the Clamp Filters (Ferrite Cores) : LFCS2/LFCS £
IMPORTANT
The clamp filter case is made of plastic, and so may crack when opened and closed at asub-zero temperature (in centigrade) or when a mechanical shock is given, such as if itfalls.
Be careful to follow the working and storage temperature limits (of an HIS and LFCS2/LFCS).
After completing the V net cable (10BASE-5 cable) connection, attach the clamp filters (thatcome with the product) to the V net cables over the cable sheath in order to improve thenoise isolation.
● Clamp Filter Set : LFCS2/LFCS £
6 ferrite cores (part No. A1179MN) per V net cable
Cable fasteners (supplied with ferrite cores)
● Positions to Attach Clamp Filters : LFCS2/LFCS £
If the cable installation plan allows, attach three clamp filters close to each other at about20 cm from the connector on each end of the cable. If this is not possible, attach themwithin 1 meter from the connector on each end.
The distance between the clamp filters and the connector should be as small as possible inorder to prevent intrusion of noise from the portion between connector and clamp filters.
A040312E.EPS
Clamp filters
V net cable
Connector
Connector
Approx. 20 cm
Figure Positions to Attach Clamp Filters : LFCS2/LFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-22<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Attaching the Clamp Filters : LFCS2/LFCS £
1. Use your finger to release the two locking hooks of a clamp filter. The clamp filter canthen be opened up to 150 degrees.
A040313E.EPS
Locking hooks
Ferrite cores
V net cable
Tie wrap Fasten with the tie wrap.
Lock the two hooks.
Figure Attaching a Clamp Filter : LFCS2/LFCS £
2. Fit the V net cable into the cylindrical gap in the opened clamp filter.
3. Close the clamp filter and lock the two locking hooks.
4. Put a tie wrap through one side of the clamp filter and fasten the tie wrap over thecable sheath to fix the clamp filter.
5. In the same manner, attach three clamp filters (two more) close to each other on eachside of the cable.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-23
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Modifying the V net Connection while the System is Running : LFCS2/LFCS £
When adding or removing communication components while the system is running, caremust be taken so as not to affect the system communication.
● When Adding a Component on V net : LFCS2/LFCS £
WARNING
When adding a component on the V net while the system is running, do not perform themodification on both buses 1 and 2 at the same time; doing so will stop the overall systemcommunication.
Confirm that there is no abnormality in the bus side that is not to be modified before startingthe modification, then carry out the modification on one bus at a time.
● Removing a Component from V net : LFCS2/LFCS £
WARNING
Do not disconnect a V net cable from the V net connector assembly unit; doing so will causea V net communication error.
1. Set the communication switch on the V net coupler unit of the component that youwant to remove, to DSBL to stop the V net communication of the component.
2. Detach the V net connector assembly from the V net coupler unit. This does not affectthe overall system communication.
● Re-connecting a Component to V net : LFCS2/LFCS £
To re-connect a component that you have removed from the V net, follow the procedurebelow.
1. Set the communication switch on the V net coupler unit of the component that youwant to re-connect, to DSBL to stop the V net communication of the component.
2. Re-attach the V net connector assembly to the V net coupler unit.
3. Set the communication switch on the V net coupler unit to ENBL.
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
A4-24<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Grounding the V net : LFCS2/LFCS £The V net (10BASE-5) must be grounded.
CAUTION
The grounding unit for V net is used to ground the V net components at one place forsafety. (Ground the V net at one place within each segment. A segment indicates the rangeof the V net network in which communication can be performed without a repeater.)
To enhance the safety, ground near the center (in terms of distance) of the segment.
● Parts Contained in Grounding Unit for V net : LFCS2/LFCS £
Table Parts Contained in Grounding Unit for V net : LFCS2/LFCS £
A040314E.EPS
Part Number Parts
A1485JT (grounding unit)
Metal block (�2)M4 bolt (�2)M4 washer (�2)Crimp-on lug (�1)Insertion claw (�1)
S9027UV
Grounding cable (800 mm�1; with M4 crimp-on lug on one side for connection to A1485JT, and M5 crimp-on lug on the other side for connection to grounding bar)
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-25
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Attaching a Grounding Unit to the V net Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £
Follow the procedure below to attach a grounding unit to the V net Cable.
1. Unscrew the two bolts of the grounding unit, and then separate the unit into the twometal blocks. The crimp-on lug fixed with a bolt is no longer necessary.
2. Insert the insertion claw that comes with the grounding unit, into the block (see thefigure below).
A040315E.EPS
Insertion claw
Bolt
Bolt
Grounding unit for V net(metal blocks)
Figure Inserting the Insertion Claw : LFCS2/LFCS £
3. Clamp the V net cable (YCB111) with the two metal blocks and tighten the two boltsalternately. At this time, fix the M4 crimp-on lug on one side of the grounding cablewith either bolt.Tightening the bolts makes the insertion claw penetrate the sheath of the V net cableand contact the outer conductor.
A040316E.EPS
Bolt
Bolt
WasherM4 crimp-on lug
M5 crimp-on lug
Washer
Grounding unit(metal block)
V net cable
Grounding cable
Insertion claw
Figure Assembling the Grounding Unit : LFCS2/LFCS £
4. After tightening the bolts, clip off the pin of the insertion claw that protrudes from themetal block.
5. Connect the other side of the connector with the M5 crimp-on lug, to the grounding barof the cabinet.
6. Be sure that the metal block will not touch a conductive material having a differentpotential from the grounding bar.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-26<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Placing the Grounding Unit for V net : LFCS2/LFCS £
Place the grounding unit for V net at the bottom of a cabinet (the grounding unit need notbe fixed), and connect the grounding cable between the grounding unit and the groundingbar as shown below.
A040317E.EPS
V net cable
Grounding unitGrounding cable
Grounding bar in a cabinet or grounding bar met with 100 ohms or less
Grounding bar
Figure Placing and Connecting the Grounding Unit for V net : LFCS2/LFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-27
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Connecting the RIO Bus Cables : LFCS2/LFCS £
WARNING
Disconnection and Connection of RIO Bus
• When disconnecting and connecting an RIO bus cable while the system is running,set the switch of the RIO bus coupler to DSBL.
• When disconnecting the RIO bus from an RIO bus coupler unit for maintenance of theFCU, detach the RIO bus branch connector. Do not disconnect the cables themselvesfrom the RIO bus branch connector.
The RIO bus is a bus that can be made dual redundant and used for communicationbetween an LFCS2/LFCS and nodes. See the figure on the next page and follow theprocedure below to connect the RIO bus cables.
1. Connect an RIO bus cable to the coupler for RIO bus 1 in the lower left of the FCU.
2. If the RIO bus is dual redundant, connect cables to the couplers for both bus 1 (left)and bus 2 (right).
3. At the end of the RIO bus connections, install the terminator (YCB128) at the unusedconnector of the RIO bus branch connector.
The figure below shows an example of RIO bus connections.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-28<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Connecting the RIO Bus Cables to a Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS :LFCS2/LFCS £
A040318E.EPS
1 2 3
4 5 6
12
3
45
6
12
3
45
6
1 2 3
4 5 6
OKOK
Color of RIO bus Cable
[3][6]
Terminalsymbol of RIO bus branch
connector
[1][4]
[2][5]
Wiring color
Tin-plated semitransparent covering or blue
Copper wire with semitransparent covering or white
Gray covering or green
To next node (Install a terminator if the connection ends.)
RIO bus (in case of dual redundant; use bus 1 when not dual redundant.)
RIO bus branch connector
Terminals on node interface unit
From another node
Bus 1
Bus 1 Bus 2
Bus 2
AFS10D/AFG10D
Figure Connecting the RIO Bus Cables to a Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS : LFCS2/LFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-29
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Connecting the RIO Bus Cables to an LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS £
A040319E.EPS
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 3
4 5 6
Terminals on RIO bus coupler unit
RIO bus distribution unit
To next node (Install a terminator if the connection ends.)
Front of Cabinet
From another node
Bus 1 Bus 2
Terminals on NIU
RIO bus (in case of dual redundant; use bus 1 when not dual redundant.)
Rear of Cabinet
Bus 1 Bus 2
*1: Use the RIO bus unit in the rear for connection to the next node. (Install a terminator if the connection ends.)
Figure Connecting the RIO Bus Cables to an LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS £
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A4-30<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
The following describes the standard for RIO bus cables used and the connection method.
● Standard for RIO Bus Cables : LFCS2/LFCS £
As an RIO bus cable, use the YCB121 sold by Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
A040320E.EPS
Shield
Figure RIO Bus Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £
● Connecting an RIO Bus Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £
Follow the procedure below to connect an RIO bus cable.
SEE ALSO
For details of how to connect each wire of an RIO bus cable to each screw terminal, see the following:
“● Details of Terminal Connections of RIO Bus Cable”
IMPORTANT
Make sure you install a terminator at both ends of the RIO bus connection.
Do not bend an RIO bus cable at a bending radius of less than 100 mm.
1. Detach the terminal cover (acrylic).
2. Connect the RIO bus cable from another node to terminals 4-6 (M4 screw terminals)of the RIO bus connector unit.
3. Connect the RIO bus cable to the next node to terminals 1-3 of the RIO bus branchconnector. It is easier to connect a cable to terminals 4-6 first.
4. Do not bend the RIO bus cables at a bending radius of less than 100 mm.
5. If no further node is connected, install a terminator (YCB128) over terminals 1-2 inorder to match the electrical characteristics. (See the figure on the next page.)
1 2 3
4 5 6
A040321E.EPS
Attaching screw of RIO bus branch connector
Attaching screw of RIO bus branch connector
Figure Terminals of RIO Bus Branch Connector : LFCS2/LFCS £
Table Sheath Colors of Wires in RIO Bus Cables and Corresponding Terminals : LFCS2/LFCS£
Terminal Nos. 1, 4 2, 5 3, 6
Wire color Semitransparent (tinned wire) or blue
Semitransparent (copper wire) or white Gray or green
A040322E.EPS
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-31
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A040323E.EPS
Terminal 1
Terminal 2
Terminator (YCB128)
RIO bus connector unit
Figure Installing Terminator at RIO Bus Connector Unit : LFCS2/LFCS £
TIP
Since terminals 4-6 are in the lower back beneath terminals 1-3 on an RIO bus connector unit, it is easierto connect the wires to terminals 4-6 before terminals 1-3.
An RIO bus cable from an LFCS2/LFCS or another node, or an RIO bus cable to be connected to thenext node can be connected to either terminals 1-3 or 4-6, in principle. However, on the connector unit atwhich the bus connection ends, it is recommended to connect the RIO bus cable to terminals 4-6 andinstall a terminator over terminals 1 and 2. This makes it easier to wire a node that is added later.
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A4-32<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Details of Terminal Connections of RIO Bus Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £
1. Losen the terminal screw.
2. Push down the spring base. There should be a 2 mm gap between the screw and thespring base.
3. Insert the crimp-on lug of a wire under the screw and fit the lug into the screw bottom.
4. Tighten the screw.
A040324E.EPS
Initial state
Fixed
Sectional View
ScrewSpring base
Losened
Approx. 2 mm
Crimp-on lug
Inserting crimp-on lug
Fitting the lug
Figure Wiring of RIO Bus Cable to Terminals : LFCS2/LFCS £
A040325E.EPS
CORRECT WRONG
Crimp-on lug
Sleeve
Ring (tongue)
Figure Correct Tightening of Crimp-on Lug : LFCS2/LFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-33
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Detaching an RIO Bus Connector Unit : LFCS2/LFCS £
Unscrew the attaching screws (two, black M3 screws.) Then pull to detach it from the nestconnector.
● Installing an RIO Bus Terminator : LFCS2/LFCS £
In the same way as “Details of Terminal Connections of RIO Bus Cable”, install the termina-tor over screw terminals 1-2 (recommended) or 4-5. Do not use terminal 3 or 6.
SEE ALSO
For details on the branch plug and the screws for installation as well as the screws of terminals, see thefollowing:
“■ Connecting the RIO Bus Cable : LFCS2/LFCS £”
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-34<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Grounding the RIO Bus : LFCS2/LFCS £
CAUTION
The equipment connected by the RIO bus must be grounded to a single grounding point.Ground one point of each segment of the RIO bus. If the RIO bus is dual redundant, groundboth bus lines. (A segment denotes the range of the RIO bus in which communication canbe performed without a repeater.)
● When Repeater is not Used : LFCS2/LFCS £
To ground the RIO bus, connect terminal 3 or 6 of the RIO bus connector unit to the FCUcasing using a grounding cable included in the accessories (see the figure below).
A040326E.EPS
Grounding cables
FCU
Figure Grounding the RIO Bus (when repeater is not used) : LFCS2/LFCS £
● When Repeater is Used : LFCS2/LFCS £
When an optical or electrical repeater is used, ground the RIO bus at the nearest point tothe FCU within each segment.
A040327E.EPS
Fiber optic cable YNT
RIO bus coupler unit
RIO bus terminator
(Example of single (not dual redundant) bus)
RIO bus coupler unit
NIUNIU
RIO bus
NIU
FCU
YNT repeater
$$$$$$
Grounding cable
Segment 1 Segment 2
Figure Grounding the RIO Bus (when repeater is used) : LFCS2/LFCS £
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-35
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.3.3 Connecting the Bus Cables to KFCS2/KFCSConnecting V net cables of KFCS2/KFCS, installing clamp filters and V net cableswiring is the same as LFCS2/LFCS. In this section, how to connect the ESB bus andER bus is explained.
WARNING
When connecting a HIS or SFCS and LFCS2/LFCS, or an KFCS2/KFCS and conversionconnector box, etc. using the V net, be careful about the following:
• Connect bus 1 to bus 1 and bus 2 to bus 2. Do not connect bus 1 to bus 2, or bus 2 tobus 1.
• For each of the stations at both ends of the V net, install the V net terminator at theopened port of the V net connector unit.
• The number of adaptive connector boxes and the distance from the cable as well asthe number of stations are limited. When the numbers exceeds the limitation, busrepeater should be used instead of adaptive connector.
SEE ALSO
For details on the limitation mentioned above, refer the system specification (GS 33Q01B10-01E) forCENTUM CS 3000 distribution production control system.
WARNING
• Disconnection of KFCS2/KFCS from V net
When disconnecting an KFCS2/KFCS from the V net while the system is running,make sure you detach the V net connector assembly rather than disconnecting the Vnet cable only.
Leave the V net connector unit attached to the cable(s).
Detaching the V net connector from the V net cable breaks the V net, causes a net-work error, and also affects communication of other stations on the network.
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A4-36<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Bus Cable Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £The figure below shows the connection human interface station (HIS) to KFCS2/KFCS withV net and connection of KFCS2/KFCS and nodes with ESB bus.
ESB bus
V net
: TerminatorBus conversion boxBus conversion box
HIS(PC)
HIS(PC)
KFCS2/KFCS
A040328E.EPS
Ethernet
HIS
Node Node
Figure V net and ESB Bus : KFCS2/KFCS £
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-37
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Connecting ESB Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £ESB bus cable (YCB301) is specific cable used for connecting the ESB bus coupler unit(AIP532) on FCU and the ESB bus slave interface module (SB401) on local node unit.
WARNING
For the connector on the ESB bus coupler, the torque for fixing the ESB bus cable shouldbe around 0.3 N•m.
For the T-type connector on the model SB401, the torque for fixing the ESB bus cableshould also be around 0.3 N•m.
● Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £
1. Connect the ESB bus cable to the connector of ESB bus coupler unit on the lower-leftof FCU.
2. If the ESB bus is in dual-redundant configuration, the left side ESB bus coupler unit isfor bus 1, the right side is for bus 2.
3. The ESB bus T-type connector (Part No. S9879UK) should be used. At the end of theESB bus node, the T-type connector (Part No. S9880UK) on SB401 with terminatorshould be used.
ESB cable connection is illustrated in the following figure.
SEE ALSO
For more information about connecting ESB bus cable to ANB10 local nodes, see the following:
“Input & Output Modules (IM 33Y06K01-01E)”
ESB bus cable(YCB301)
ESB bus coupler unit(AIP532)
ANB10Local node unit
SB401 SB401
A040329E.EPS
T-type connector T-type connector
Figure Connection of ESB Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-38<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● ESB Bus KFCS2/KFCS £
Either ESB bus branching connector or the branching connector that has a built-in ESB busterminator must be mounted to SB401 installed in ESB bus node unit. If a node unit isconnected next, select ESB bus branching connector. If the node unit is the last one, selectthe branching connector that has a built-in ESB bus terminator.
A040330E.EPS
Bus1
ESB bus (in case of dual redundant; use bus 1 when not dual redundant)
REVISIONU H1 H2
MODEL
AIP532STYLE1 SI
YOKOGAWA
ESB BusCN1
RCV
SND-L
SND-R
Bus 2
SB401 withS9879UK
SB401 withS9879UK
Bus 2
To next node
Bus 1
REVISIONU H1 H2
MODEL
AIP532STYLE1 SI
YOKOGAWA
ESB BusCN1
RCV
SND-L
SND-R
AFG30D
REVISIONU H1 H2
MODEL
AIP532STYLE1 SI
YOKOGAWA
ESB BusCN1
RCV
SND-L
SND-R
REVISIONU H1 H2
MODEL
AIP532STYLE1 SI
YOKOGAWA
ESB BusCN1
RCV
SND-L
SND-R
ANB10DConnector unit for
ESB bus(S9879UK)Connector unit
with terminator forESB bus (S9880UK)
ESB bus cable (YCB301)
Screw tightening torque: 0.3 N•m
Figure ESB Bus : KFCS2/KFCS £
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-39
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Connecting ER Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £ER bus cable (YCB141) is specific cable used for connecting the ER bus master interfacemodule (EB401) on local node unit and the ER bus slave interface module (EB501) onremote node unit.
● Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £
1. Connect the ER bus cable to the connector of EB401 on the left side (odd slot) of localnode unit.
2. If the ER bus is in dual-redundant configuration, the left side (odd slot) EB401 is forbus 1, the right side (even slot) is for bus 2.
3. At the end of the ER bus node, the T-type connector (Model YCB148) on EB501 withterminator should be used.
ER cable connection is illustrated in the following figure.
SEE ALSO
For more information about connecting ER bus cable to ANB10 local nodes, see the following:
“Input & Output Modules (IM 33Y06K01-01E)”
A040331E.EPS
EB401 ER bus(YCB141)
Local node unit(ANB10D)
Remote node unit(ANR10D)
To next node (Install a terminator if the connection ends.)
EB501
Figure Connection of ER Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
A4-40<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● ER Bus Wiring : KFCS2/KFCS £
The figure shown below describes how to wiring ER bus:
A040332E.EPS
ANB10D
EB401
Terminator (*1)(YCB148)
Clamp filter (*2)(A1193MN)
ANR10D
YCB141
Connect to the next ER bus node unit
Adjust the cable length on the cable tray if required
Fix with using a cable fastener at the front right edge of cable tray. Separate from other cables as much as possible.
Separate from other cables
Fix with using a cable fastener at the front right edge of cable tray
*1: Regarding EB401 and a remote node, if one side of T-type connector is terminal, mount a terminator. Two terminatorsare supplied with EB401.
*2: Regarding EB401 and a remote node, mount clamp filters to both side of T-type connector. If one of the sides isterminal, mount a clamp filter to only the cable side. Two (four for dual-redundant) clamp filters are supplied with theremote node. For EB401, use the clamp filter supplied with the terminal remote node.
Figure ER Bus Wiring : KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-41
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Procedure of ER Bus Cable Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £
An ER bus cable is equivalent to a 10BASE-2 Ethernet cable (model YCB141). The follow-ing explains how to connect it:
1. Connect a T-type connector to the BNC connector located at the bottom part of theEB401 or EB501 module.
2. Connect an ER bus cable to both sides of the T-type branch connector. If the corre-sponding ER bus interface module is position at the end, connect a terminal resistor(provided with EB401 : 50 ohm) to one side of the T-type branch connector.
A040333E.EPS
ER bus cable
T-type branch connector
ER bus cable
Terminator
T-type branch connector
Figure ER Bus Cable Connection : KFCS2/KFCS £
3. When the ER bus cable is connected, put the T-type branch connector betweeninsulation sheets to prevent it from touching other metals. The surfaces of the insula-tion sheets that come with the T-type branch connector (2 sheets) are adhesive. Thefigure below shows how to attach them.
• Place two pieces of insulation sheets so that the adhesive surfaces face the T-typebranch connector and sandwich the T-type branch connector between them.
• Press the two pieces of insulation sheets together tightly with your fingers, makingsure that the sheets cover the metal part of the T-type branch connector.
4. Place clamp filters on both sides of the T-type branch connector at positions as closeas possible to the connector. Fix the clamp filters (provided with remote node) to thecables using a tie wrap.
A040334E.EPS
Insulation sheet
T-type branch connector
Figure Insulation Sheet : KFCS2/KFCS £
A040335E.EPS
Clamp FilterTie Wrap
Figure Clamp Filter : KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A4-42<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.3.4 Connecting Bus Cables to FFCSThis section describes the connections of the V net, ESB bus and ER bus cables.
IMPORTANT
When wiring the V net cable for V net coupler unit, note the following:
• Always connect “Bus 1 to Bus 1” and “Bus 2 to Bus 2” of the FFCS. Do not connect“Bus 1 to Bus 2” and “Bus 2 to “Bus 1.”
• When the V net connection becomes an end terminal for the station, install a V netterminator on the unwired connection port of the V net branch connector.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-43
IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
■ Connecting V net Cable : FFCS £How to connect V net cable is explained as follows.
The 10BASE-2 type cable is used as the V net cable. The V net branch connector for V netcoupler is connected to BNC connector.
The connecting of V net for a human interface station (HIS) and a field control unit is shownas follows:
A040336E.EPS
To next device(Install a terminator if the connection end)
From another node
Bus 2 Bus 2
Bus 1 Bus 1
PRINTERRS-232C-A
(COM2)
EXTRS-232C-B
(COM1)SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 SLOT6 SLOT7
HIS rear
V net cable(10BASE-2)
Field control unit
CN2(CPU-L)
CN3(CPU-R)
CN1 ENBL
DSBL
CN2(CPU-L)
CN3(CPU-R)
TM1READY
FUSE RL1
CN1 ENBL
DSBL
CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC � L N
CN2 (PSU-R)
Figure Connecting of V net Cable : FFCS £
A4-44<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
● Connecting V net Cable : FFCS £
1. Turn the communication switch on V net coupler unit into DSBL position.
2. Connect the T-type V net branch connector for V net coupler unit to BNC connector.For dual-redundant V net, both bus1 and bus2 should be connected.
3. After connecting the V net cable, put a black silicone rubber cover over it.
(Silicone rubber cover is a component of FFCS accessories. Part number : T9070UQ)
4. Turn the communication switch on V net coupler unit into ENBL position.
A040337E.EPS
V net cable
V net coupler unit
T-type V net branch connector
Communication switch
Cover
Figure Connecting V net Cable : FFCS £
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-45
IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
■ Connecting V net Coupler Cable : FFCS £A V net coupler cable is used to link the V net coupler unit and processor module. Twomodular connectors with keys are used on each side of the cable. Connect the connectorsas illustrated in the following drawing. However, following drawing shows a dual-redundantsystem. If the processor is single, CN3 will not be used.
• Use the bus1 cable to connect CN2 of coupler unit to BUS1 connector on left sideprocessor module.
• Use the bus1 cable to connect CN3 of coupler unit to BUS1 connector on right sideprocessor module.
• Use the bus2 cable to connect CN2 of coupler unit to BUS2 connector on left sideprocessor module.
• Use the bus2 cable to connect CN3 of coupler unit to BUS2 connector on right sideprocessor module.
The connecting route is shown in the following figure. The cable can be pulled through thecorner hole of cable tray.
SEE ALSO
For more information about connecting and disconnecting the V net coupler cable, see the following:
“■ Replacing Processor Module : FFCS £” in A7.5.1, Replacing Common Modules
“■ Replacing V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £” in A7.5.1, Replacing Common Modules
A040338E.EPS
Cable between V net coupler unit and processor module
Corner hole of cable tray
V net coupler cable
V net cable
Bus 1 (left side)coupler unit
CN2 CN3
Bus 2 (right side)coupler unit
CN2 CN3
BUS1
BUS2
BUS1
BUS2
Left side processor module
Right side processor module
Figure V net Coupler Cable Route : FFCS £
A4-46<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
■ Using the Control bus Converter Unit : FFCS £V net cable (10BASE-2) and V net cable (10BASE-5) can be connected via the control busconverter unit (YCB149).
However, the weight and the strength of the cables are various, the control bus converterunit needs to be fixed firmly.
• To fix the control bus converter unit as close as possible to the V net connector so asto reduce the load of the bus.
• To fix the control bus converter unit somewhere near FFCS or HIS above the floorlevel so as to make maintenance convenient.
• Do not fix the control bus converter unit to the place where people may pass by.
An example of control bus converter unit installation is shown below.
V net cable (10BASE-5)
FFCS
Under floor level
A040339E.EPS
V net branch connector
Control bus converter unit
Fixed
V net cable (10BASE-2)
Figure Using the Control bus Converter Unit : FFCS £
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-47
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
■ Connecting ESB Bus Cable : FFCS £How to install ESB bus coupler module to the field control unit and how to connectESB node unit (local node) are explained in this chapter.
● ESB Bus : FFCS £
The communication bus to link the field control unit and the local nodes unit is referred to asESB bus. The field control unit is always at one end of the bus. The branch connector of theESB bus coupler module is provided with a terminator. At the other end of the ESB bus, thisterminator should be put on the branch connector. For the node units in between the twoends, ESB bus branch connectors can be used for connection. A drawing of ESB busconnection is shown as follows.
A040340E.EPS
Bus1
ESB bus (in case of dual redundant; use bus 1 when not dual redundant)
Bus 2
Bus 2
To next node
Bus 1
ANB10D (local node)
Field control unit
Connector unit for ESB bus(S9879UK)
Connector unit with terminator for
ESB bus (S9880UK)
ESB bus cable (YCB301)
Screw tightening torque: 0.3 N•m
ESB bus coupler module (EC401)
SB401 with connector unit for ESB bus (S9879UK)
ESB bus branch connector
Figure ESB Bus Connection : FFCS £
A4-48<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
■ Connecting ER Bus Cable : FFCS £
SEE ALSO
For more information about connecting ER bus cables, see the following:
“■ Connection ER Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS £” in A4.3.3, “Connecting the Bus Cables to KFCS2/KFCS”
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-49
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.4 V net ConversionThe length of V net cable (10BASE-2) is limited to 185 meters between the devices.However, this distance can be extended to 500 meters by using 10BASE-5 cable.How to use 10BASE-5 cable is explained as follows.
■ Using the Control bus Conversion AdapterControl bus adapter (Model : YCB147) is an adapter for connecting the V net cable(10BASE-5) with V net cable (10BASE-2).
An BNC type connector is provided on one side of YCB147. The V net cable (10BASE-2)from HIS may be connected on this connector.
The other side of YCB147 is provided with N type connector, the V net cable (10BASE-5)may be connected on this connector.
It is required to install the clamp filters to V net cables.
A040401E.EPS
BNC-type connector
N-type connector
V net cable(10BASE-2)
V net cable(10BASE-5)
Figure Adapter for Connecting the V net Cable (10BASE-2) with V net Cable (10BASE-5)
10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
A4-50<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A4.5 Connecting a Cable to Contact OutputThis section describes how to connect a cable to contact output of PFCS/SFCS ,LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and FFCS.
CAUTION
• All equipment connected to a contact output, including the signal wires, junctionterminals, relays, and power supply unit, should comply with CSA 1010 or CSA 950(for a 100-120 V AC power supply), or EN 61010-1 (for a 220-240 V AC power sup-ply).
• When performing wiring for the READY output terminals, attach the clamp filter (partNo. A1193MN, included in accessories) near the terminals. The clamp filter is suppliedwith CE Mark-certified LFCS2/LFCS and KFCS2/KFCS of both rack mountable typesand cabinet types.
• The cable connected to the READY (processor status contact output) terminalsshould run at least 1 cm from other signal cables since a high voltage is applied to it.
Each field control station (an PFCS/SFCS, LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and FFCS) moni-tors its own processor status. Upon detection of a failure, it outputs a system alarm andopens the output contact. This break (normally closed) contact is labeled as READY, and isopened in the following cases:
• When the CPU stops control.
• Duplexed CPUs, when both CPUs stop control.
• When the power supply fails.
• Duplexed power supplies, when both power supplies fail.
Make sure of the following when using the contact output:
• Avoid applying an AC voltage directly to the contact output terminal. Use a voltage lessthan the rated.
• When this contact directly drives an external relay or the like, use a spark killer toprotect the relay contact.
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-51
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Contact Output Wiring : PFCS/SFCSThe figures below show the contact output terminals of a PFCS/SFCS and an example ofusing a spark killer.
A040501E.EPS
TM1 READY
Contact output terminals
Figure Contact Output Unit : PFCS/SFCS
A040502E.EPS
Spark killer
24 V DC
External relay
READY contact
Contact rating: 300 mA or less at 30 V DC
Figure Use of Spark Killer : PFCS/SFCS
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A4-52<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Contact Output Wiring : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
● Rack Mountable Type : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
The figures below show the contact output terminals of a rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS and an example of using a spark killer.
A040503E.EPS
READY
TM1
FUSE
RL1 RL2FAN ALARM
N1 N2
Clamp filter
Contact output terminals
Figure Contact Output Terminals (on External Interface Unit) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
A040504E.EPS
24 V DC
Spark killerExternal relay
READY contact
Figure Use of Spark Killer : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A4. Cable Connections> A4-53
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Contact Output Wiring £
● LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet Type : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS£
The figures below show the contact output terminals of an LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSwith cabinet and an example of using a spark killer.
A040505E.EPS
Contact output terminals
Figure Contact Output Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Contact
Inductive load such as solenoid valve
Contact Protection by Diode
Contact Protection by CR Circuit
Power supply
Contact
Power supply
Inductive load
A040506E.EPS
External circuitLFCS
Figure Use of Spark Killer : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A4-54<A4. Cable Connections>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Contact Output Wiring : FFCS £The figures below show the contact output terminals of a FFCS and an example of using aspark killer.
A040507E.EPSContact output terminal
TM1READY
FUSE RL1 CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC �
CN2 (PSU-R)
L N
Figure Contact Output Terminal : FFCS £
A040508E.EPS
Spark killer
24 V DC
External relay
READY contact
Contact rating: 0.3A or less, 30 V DC or less
Figure Use of Spark Killer : FFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A5. Operations and Setups> A5-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A5. Operations and SetupsThis chapter describes the operations and setups of a FCS.
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
A5-2<A5. Operations and Setups>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A5.1 Setting Up UnitsThis section describes setting of switches of FCS units.
■ Setting Up PFCS Units : PFCS/SFCSWhen replacing units, follow the instructions below if the unit has setting elements, such asdip switches and toggle switches:
• Processor cardAdjust the station address (station number) before replacement.
• Battery unit:Turn on the battery switch after installing the unit to the PFCS/SFCS.
• Control bus coupler unit:Install the control bus coupler unit with the communication switch set to DSBL, andturn the switch to ENBL after installation.
The table below shows a list of setting elements.
SEE ALSO
For how to set the station address for the set processor card, see the following:
A6.1, “Functions of Each Unit in PFCS/SFCS”
Table List of Setting Elements : PFCS/SFCS
Unit Name Setting ItemNormal Position of
Toggle Switch
Processor Station address —
Battery Battery switch (ON/OFF) ON
Control bus coupler Communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) ENBL
A050101E.EPS
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<A5. Operations and Setups> A5-3
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Setup of Each Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Some cards and units have setup switches. When replacing a card or unit with a spare,make the following setups:
• Processor cardSet up the station address (domain and station numbers) on the spare card beforereplacing it.
• Power supply unitTurn on the battery switch after installing the unit in the FCU.
• V net coupler unitLeave the communication switch of the spare V net coupler unit set to DSBL beforeand during installation. Set it to ENBL after installing the unit.
• RIO bus coupler unit (*1)Leave the communication switch of the spare RIO bus coupler unit set to DSBL beforeand during installation. Set it to ENBL after installing the unit.
• ESB bus interface module(*2)Before replacing the module, the dipswitch of the IP address and synchronizationmode should be correctly set.
*1 : LFCS2/LFCS*2 : For models AFS30D, AFG30D, AFS40D and AFG40D
The table below lists the setup items.
Table Setup of Each Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Setup ItemCard (Unit) Normal Position of Toggle Switch
Station address (domain and station numbers) -
-
Battery switch (ON/OFF) ON
Communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) ENBL
Processor
Power supply unit
V net coupler
RIO bus coupler (*1)
ESB bus interface master module(*2)
Communication switch (ENBL/DSBL)
Dip switch (for setting IP address and synchronization mode)
ENBL
A050102E.EPS
*1 : LFCS2/LFCS*2 : For models AFS30D, AFG30D, AFS40D and AFG40D
SEE ALSO
• For the respective setup procedure, see the following:
A6.2, “Functions of Each Unit in LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS”
• For how to set up the station address on a processor card, the following:
A6.2.6, “Processor Card in FCU”
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
A5-4<A5. Operations and Setups>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
■ Setup of Each Unit : FFCS £When a module or a unit is replaced or exchanged, the dipswitches or the toggle switcheson the module or the unit need to be adjusted accordingly. The details are shown as follows:
• Processor Card
The Station Address (Domain Number, Station Numbers) of the new card should be thesame as the settings on the replaced card.
• V Net Coupler
The communication switch of the V net coupler should be kept on DSBL position duringinstallation. And then it should be switched to ENBL position after the installation.
• ESB Bus Interface Module
When the module is replaced with a new one, the dipswitches for the node number shouldbe correctly set.
• ER Bus Interface Module
When the module is replaced with a new one, the dipswitches for the IP address should becorrectly set.
The settings are detailed in the table below:
Table Setup of Each Unit : FFCS £
Setupmodule or Unit Normal Position of Toggle Switch
Station address (domain and station numbers) -
-
Communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) ENBL
Processor module
V net coupler unit
ESB bus interface module ESB bus address (node number)
-ER bus interface slave module IP address (node number)
A050103E.EPS
SEE ALSO
For more information about settings of dipswitches and toggle switches, see the following:
A6.3 “Configuration and Functions of Each Unit in FFCS”
<A5. Operations and Setups> A5-5
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A5.2 Turning On/Off the PowerThis section describes the procedure to turn on and off the power supply to LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet, using the flow chart.
■ Turning On/Off the Power : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £In an LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet, you will find a circuit breaker on the mainpower distribution board.
This circuit breaker turns on/off the power to the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and all nodesin the cabinet. To turn on/off the power to the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS only, connectand disconnect the cable connector from the power unit in the upper front of the cabinet.
Turning on/off the power causes the alarm buzzer to sound and a message to be displayedat a HIS connected on the same V net.
A050201E.EPS
I
O
TM1
I
O
TM1
Circuit breaker Circuit breaker
Figure Main Power Distribution Unit (for Dual Power Supply) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
WARNING
There is no power switch on the power distribution board of a rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS or PFCS/SFCS. Provide a separate switch or breaker for turning on/off the power.
A5-6<A5. Operations and Setups>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Turning On/Off Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £The steps to turn on and off the FCS (with cabinet) power supply are explained.
The flow chart explains the steps to turn on and off the power supply.
When the power supply is turned on or off, a system alarm is indicated on the window ofthe HIS which is connected via VL net or V net, and a corresponding message appears atthe same time.
When the FCS (with cabinet) power supply is turned on, the green RDY lamp of each cardor unit turns on.
A050202E.EPS
Steps to turn on the power supply
Confirm the switch setting on the front side of the unit.
Turn on the external power supply switch.
Are the contents of the FCS
memory volatile?
Operation status
NO
YES
Download the FCS
database.
Steps to turn off the power supply
Turn off the battery on/off switch.
Turn off the external power supply switch.
Has the power supply been turned off for longer than 72 hours?
End
Confirm that the battery on/off switch is turned on.
Is it necessary to save the FCS tuning parameters?
NO
YES
YES
NO
Save the FCS tuning parameters.
Before turning off the power supply, it is recommended to save the tuning parameters even if the power supply has been turned off for less than 72 hours.
Figure Steps to Turn ON/OFF the Power Supply : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCSThis chapter describes the functions and setup of each unit and card composing aFCS.
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
A6-2<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.1 Functions of Each Unit in PFCS/SFCSThis section introduces the functions of each unit composing a PFCS/SFCS, and themeanings of the statuses of indicator lamps on each card.
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-3
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.1.1 Power Distribution Board of PFCS/SFCSThe power distribution board receives a specified power supply at the power supplyinput terminals, and outputs it through a noise filter to the power supply outputconnectors.
● Configuration : PFCS/SFCS
There is no power switch on the PFCS/SFCS. Prepare a separate power switch or circuitbreaker.
To turn off the power to the cards, disconnect the power supply output connectors (CN1and CN2) on the power distribution board.
• TM1 terminals:M4 screw terminals for power supply input
L : UngroundedN : GroundedProtective grounding terminal : Ground
• CN1 connector:Power supply output connectorConnect the cable from the left-side power supply unit of a duplexed FCU.
• CN2 connector:Power supply output connectorConnect the cable from the right-side power supply unit
A060101E.EPS
CN1(PSU-L) CN2(PSU-R)
STATION ADDRESS COMPONENT NO.
DOMEIN NO. STATION NO.
TM1
L
N
100~120VAC~
Power supply input terminals
Power supply output connector (for right-side power supply unit)
Power supply output connector (for left-side power supply unit)
Figure Power Distribution Board : PFCS/SFCS
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
A6-4<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.1.2 Power Supply Unit of PFCS/SFCSThis unit supplies power to the common part of the PFCS/SFCS.
● RDY Lamp : PFCS/SFCS
The green status-display lamp (RDY lamp) turns on when the power unit is operatingnormally.
It turns off when the power failure occurs or when the unit is operating abnormally.
IMPORTANT
The maintenance connector (CHK) is used by a service engineer during maintenancework.
A060102E.EPS
: Power ON: Power OFF
RDY lamp
Maintenance connector (CHK)
Handle
ON/OFF switch
Power supply cable
To the connector on the power distribution board
Figure Power Supply Unit : PFCS/SFCS
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-5
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.1.3 Battery Unit of PFCS/SFCSThe battery unit is used for backing up the main memory of the processor card whenpower failure occurs.
CAUTION
Use batteries specified by Yokogawa Electric.
The part number of battery pack is S9765UK.
SEE ALSO
For how to replace the battery unit, see the following:
A7.3.4, “Battery Unit Replacement Procedure”
● Battery Back-up Specifications : PFCS/SFCS
• Backup time : Up to 72 hours
• Battery life : Varies depending on ambient temperature3 years at 30 deg C or less1.5 years at 40 deg C or less9 months at 50 deg C or less
As for battery output, the left battery unit backs up the left CPU and the right battery unit theright CPU.
In the single system, the battery unit is installed on the left side.
ON
OFF
CPUBACKUP
’08.12
A060103E.EPSBattery life label
Battery life label
Screw for attaching battery pack assembly
Figure Battery Unit and Battery Life Label : PFCS/SFCS
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-6<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6.1.4 Processor Card of PFCS/SFCSProcessor card performs control operations.
This section describes the procedure to set the domain number and station numberwith the DIP switches located at the front of the processor card.
There are two types of processor cards:
• CP701 Standard type (*1)
• CP703 Enhanced type (*1), Compact type
When abnormality is detected in the CPU or power supply unit, contact signals are outputfrom the READY terminal of the contact output unit.
*1: ¡ For CS 1000 only CP701 standard type and CP703 enhanced type are available.
■ Configuration : PFCS/SFCS
● Status Lamps : PFCS/SFCS
• HRDY:The processor card performs self diagnosis. If the processor card is normal, the greenlight turns on. If abnormality is found, the light turns off.
• RDY:The green light turns on if both the hardware and software are normal. If either of themis abnormal, the light turns off.
• CTRL:In the duplex PFCS/SFCS, the green light turns on if the processor card is the controlside and turns off if it is the standby side. When starting up the duplex PFCS/SFCS,the right side becomes the control side. In the single PFCS/SFCS, the green light isalways on.
• COPY:In the duplex PFCS/SFCS, the green light turns on when program copy is executedand turns off when program copy is completed.When a processor card has been replaced or when the unit is stopped then startedagain, the standby side processor card automatically copies the program of thecontrol side processor card. When copy is completed, the light turns off.In the single PFCS/SFCS, the light is always off.
• START/STOP:This maintenance switch is used for forcing stop or restarting the processor card CPU.If this switch is pressed when the processor card is still operating, the CPU will stop.If this switch is pressed when the processor card is not operating, the CPU will restart.This switch is located inside a hole next to the START/STOP sign.Push the switch using a slender bar of around 2 mm in diameter.
● CN1 Connector : PFCS/SFCS
Do not connect anything to the CN1 connector, since it is used for maintenance purposesonly.
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-7
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
HRDYRDY
CTRLCOPY
CN1
START/STOP
STATIONADDRESS
0 1
PARTY
0 1
PARTY
A060104E.EPS
CTRL lamp
CN1 connector
Used for setting the domain number
DIP switches used for setting the station address
Used for setting the station number
COPY lamp
START/STOP switch
HRDY lampRDY lamp
Figure Processor Card
A6-8<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Setting the Domain Number : PFCS/SFCSA domain is a range of stations that are linked by a single VL net system.
In a single system, the domain number is set to “1.”
Unless specified, the DIP switch is shipped with all the bits OFF.
Set the domain number between 1 and 16. Necessary domain numbers can be set bychanging the DIP switch settings as shown in the table.
The DIP switches corresponding the bit numbers 2 and 3 are always “0.”
A060105E.EPS
MSB: Most Significant BitLSB: Least Significant Bit
Parity of the domain number (1 bit) (odd parity)
Fixed to 0 (2 bits)
Domain number (5 bits)
Figure Domain Number Setting DIP Switches : PFCS/SFCS
Table Domain Numbers and Switch Settings : PFCS/SFCS
Domain number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
A060106E.EPS
Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.
10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-9
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Setting the Station Number : PFCS/SFCSSet station number specified following range.
• Within the range of 1 to 24 (*1)
• Within the range of 1 to 64 (*2)
*1: ¡ In case of CS 1000*2: £ In case of CS 3000Necessary station numbers can be set by changing the DIP switch settings as shown in thetable below:
A060107E.EPS
MSB : Most Significant Bit (highest-order bit)LSB : Least Significant Bit (lowest-order bit)
Station number parity (1-bit) (odd parity)
Station number (7-bit)
Figure Station Number Setting DIP Switches : PFCS/SFCS
Table Station Numbers and Switch Settings : PFCS/SFCS
Station number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
12 13 14 15 16
1 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1
1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 1 0
60 61 62 63 64
1 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 1
1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 1 0
Station number 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Bit 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
A060108E.EPS
Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.
10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
A6-10<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
A6.1.5 Control Bus Coupler UnitThe control bus coupler is located between the control bus cable and the PFCS/SFCS processor card, and performs insulation and level conversion of control bussignals.
Either a single or duplex control bus coupler can be used.
In the duplex system, two coupler units are used. In this case, Bus 1 is on the left side.
● Status Lamps : PFCS/SFCS
• RCV:The green light turns on when the communication carrier is receiving signals fromcontrol bus.Otherwise, the lamp is off.
• SND-L:The green light turns on when the processor card located on the left side of the PFCS/SFCS is sending data to control bus. Otherwise, the light is off.
• SND-R:The green light turns on when the processor card located on the right side of thePFCS/SFCS is sending data to control bus. Otherwise, the light is off.
When the communication switch is tilted toward the DSBL side, all lamps are off.
CN
1
CN
2
ENBL
DSBL
A060109E.EPS
RCV
NS
DL R
NS
D
BUS1
SND-R lamp
SND-L lamp
RCV lamp
Communication switch
Figure Control Bus coupler unit : PFCS/SFCS
■ Setting Elements : PFCS/SFCS
● Communication Switch : PFCS/SFCS
• ENBL:Performs communication with control bus. Set the switch in this position during normaloperation.
• DSBL:Set the switch in this position if communication with control bus is to be stopped.
A lock-type switch is used for the toggle switch.
When switching, do so while pulling the knob forward.
Tilt the switch upward to obtain the ENBL setting and downward to obtain the DSBL setting.
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-11
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A6.2 Functions of Each Unit in LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSThis section introduces the functions of each unit composing an LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS, and the meanings of the statuses of indicator lamps on each card.
A6-12<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.1 Power Distribution Board of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCSThe power distribution board receives a specified power supply at the power supplyinput terminals, and outputs it through a noise filter to the power supply outputconnectors.
● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
There is no power switch on the rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS. Prepare aseparate power switch or circuit breaker.
To turn off the power to the cards, disconnect the power supply output connectors (CN1and CN2) on the power distribution board.
• TM1 terminals:M4 screw terminals for power supply input
L : UngroundedN : GroundedProtective grounding terminal : Ground
• CN1 connector:Power supply output connectorConnect the cable from the left-side power supply unit of a duplexed FCU.
• CN2 connector:Power supply output connectorConnect the cable from the right-side power supply unit.
TM1 L N100-120VAC~
CN2(PSU-R)
CN1(PSU-L)
A060201E.EPS
Power supply output connector (for left-side power supply unit)
Power supply output connector (for right-side power supply unit)
Power supply input terminals
Figure Power Distribution Board of Rack Mountable : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-13
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.2 Power Distribution Boards of LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSwith CabinetAn LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet has a main power distribution board,nest power distribution board, FCU power distribution board and node power distri-bution board.
■ Main Power Distribution Board : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £The main power distribution board receives a specified power supply and distributes it,through a circuit breaker and noise filter, to nest power distribution boards in the front andtwo node power distribution boards in the rear. The power supply output terminals areprovided on the rear panel of the main power distribution board.
● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• TM1 terminals:M6 screw terminals for power supply inputL UngroundedN Grounded
• Circuit breakerTurns on/off the power to the entire cabinet.Toggling up the switch arm of the circuit breaker turns on the power.Toggling down the switch arm of the circuit breaker turns off the power.(There are two breakers in case of dual power supply.)
• Contact output unit:Provides an output contact representing a failure of the FCU’s processor card.
Front RearA060202E.EPS
Circuit breaker Contact output unit
Power supply input terminals Power supply input terminals
Power supply output terminals
Figure Main Power Distribution Board (for Dual Power Supply) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-14<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Nest Power Distribution Boards : LFCS2/LFCS £Nest power distribution boards distribute the power to the power supply unit(s) of the FCUand nodes on the front side of the cabinet.
● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £
There is an identical nest power distribution board on the left and right of the FCU in theupper front of the cabinet. Each nest power distribution board distributes the power to boththe FCU and nodes in the front side of the cabinet. The standard configuration can be usedfor either single or dual power supply.
If the power supply to the cabinet is single, connect the power cable from the main powerdistribution board to the nest power distribution board on the right (when looking at thecabinet from the front).
• CN1 (FCU) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the FCU
• CN2 (NIU1) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 1 node (in F1)
• CN3 (NIU2) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 2 node (in F2)
• CN4 (NIU3) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 3 node (in F3)
R
CN2(NIU1)
CN3(NIU2)
CN4(NIU3)
L N
A060203E.EPS
CN1For FCU
CN2For No. 1 node (F1)
CN3For No. 2 node (F2)
CN4For No. 3 node (F3)
Input terminals for power supply to nodes
Figure Nest Power Distribution Board (Front) : LFCS2/LFCS £
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-15
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ FCU Power Distribution Boards : KFCS2/KFCS £FCU power distribution boards distribute the power to the power supply unit(s) of the FCU.
● Configuration : KFCS2/KFCS £
There is an identical FCU power distribution board on the right of the FCU in the upper frontof the cabinet. The standard configuration can be used for either redundant or non-redun-dant power supply.
If the power supply to the cabinet is non-redundant type, connect the power cable on theCN2 connector (FCU-R).
• CN1 (FCU-L) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the left side
• CN2 (FCU-R) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the right side
CN1(FCU-L)
CN2(FCU-R)
A060204E.EPS
CN1Power supply output connector (for left-side power supply unit)
CN2Power supply output connector (for right-side power supply unit)
Figure FCU Power Distribution Board : KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-16<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Node Power Distribution Boards : LFCS2/LFCS £Node power distribution boards distribute the power to the nodes on the rear side of thecabinet.
● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £
There is an identical node power distribution board on the left and right of the FCU in theupper rear of the cabinet. The standard configuration can be used for either single or dualpower supply.
If the power supply to the cabinet is single, connect the power cable from the main powerdistribution board to the node power distribution board on the right (when looking at thecabinet from the rear).
• CN1 (NIU1) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 1 node (in R1)
• CN2 (NIU2) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 2 node (in R2)
• CN3 (NIU3) connector:Power to the power supply unit of the No. 3 node (in R3)
CN1(NIU1)
CN2(NIU2)
CN3(NIU3)
L N
A060205E.EPS
CN1For No. 1 node (R1)
CN2For No. 2 node (R2)
CN3For No. 3 node (R3)
Input terminals for power supply
Figure Node Power Distribution Board (Rear) : LFCS2/LFCS £
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-17
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Node Power Distribution Boards : KFCS2/KFCS £The KFCS2/KFCS node power distribution boards are used to distribute the power from themain power distribution board to node and FCU power distribution board.
● Configuration : KFCS2/KFCS £
Node power distribution board are located on the central part of both front side bus-unit andrear side of cabinet.
• CN1 to CN14 connectors:
CN1/CN2, CN3/CN4 ...CN13/CN14 are the connector for distributing powers to nodes.
• TM1, TM2 terminals:
They are the terminals for connecting the power cables from the main power board.
Power supply input terminal
Power distribution connector(to Node Unit)
A060206E.EPS
Figure Node Power Distribution Board (Front) : KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-18<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.3 RIO Bus Distribution UnitRIO bus distribution units are provided in the front and rear sides of an LFCS2/LFCSwith cabinet.
Each RIO bus distribution unit connects up to three nodes to the same RIO bus.
The standard RIO bus distribution unit can be used for either a single or dual RIObus.
● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £
• RIO bus connectors:Cables from up to three NIUs can be connected.
• RIO bus branch connector:Connect RIO bus cables or install terminators.
A060207E.EPS
RIO bus connectors (2�3 sets) RIO bus branch connector
Figure RIO Bus Distribution Unit : LFCS2/LFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-19
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.4 Power Unit in FCUThe power unit in an FCU receives the specified power supply from the power distri-bution board, converts it to an isolated direct-current voltage, and supplies that DCpower to each unit and card in the FCU.
● Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• RDY lamp:Lights in green when normal; lights off when failed.
• CHK connector:Used by a service engineer for maintenance.
• Battery unit:For memory backup
RDY
CHK
BATTERYON
OFF
A060208E.EPS
BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)
98. 1,
Attaching screws
RDY lamp
CHK connector (for maintenance)
Battery ON/OFF (toggle) switch
Battery unit
Battery life label
Attaching screws
Cable with connector
Figure Power Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
■ Setting Elements : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £• Battery ON/OFF switch:
Selects whether to back up the contents of the main memory in the processor cardand RIO bus interface card (*1) during a power failure.ON: Enables the backup. Select this position during normal operation.OFF: Disables the backup. The backup time provided by the battery is up to 72
hours. When shutting down the power supply for more than 72 hours, setthe switch to OFF to avoid draining the battery.
This is a locking toggle switch.To toggle the switch position, pull the switch lever to unlock it first.
*1: Case for LFCS2/LFCS
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-20<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.5 Battery Unit in FCUThe FCU battery unit backs up the memory in the processor card during a powerfailure.
● Specifications : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• Backup time : Up to 72 hours
• Battery life : Varies depending on ambient temperature3 years at 30 deg C or less1.5 years at 40 deg C or less9 months at 50 deg C or less
■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Built into the power supply unit. The output from the battery is converted to 5 V DC in thepower supply unit and connected to the processor card via the back board.
A060209E.EPS
Attaching screw
Battery life label
Connector (connected to the power supply unit)
Battery pack (with connector)
Figure Battery Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-21
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.6 Processor Card in FCUThe processor card performs control calculations as well as monitors its own CPUand power supply.
Upon detection of a failure, it outputs the alarm from the READY contact outputterminals.
■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
● Status Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
HRDY:The green lamp turns on if the hardware is found to be normal by the self-diagnostics;otherwise, it turns off.
RDY:The green lamp turns on only if both the hardware and software are normal.
CTRL:The green lamp turns on if the processor card is in service for a duplexed FCU. It turns offin the stand by mode. When the power of a duplexed FCU is turned on, the processor cardon the right side is selected for service.
COPY:The green lamp turns on while the processor card is carrying out the program copy for theduplexed FCU. It turns off upon end of copying.
When a processor card is replaced, or when an off-line load is carried out for starting fromthe stopped state, the processor card in the stand by mode automatically copies the pro-gram from the processor card in service.
● Maintenance Switch : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
START/STOP:Used to forcibly stop and restart the CPU of the processor card. Pressing this switch whilethe CPU is running stops the CPU.
Pressing it while the CPU is stopped starts the CPU. This switch is hidden in the hole nextto the START/STOP label. Use a stick having a 1 to 2 mm diameter tip to press this switch.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-22<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
RDY
CTRL
COPY
START/STOP
CN1
V Net ADDRESS
0 1
0 1
ODD PARTY
ODD PARTY
00MSB
MSB
DOMAIN No.
STATION No.
LSB
LSB
A060210E.EPS
HRDY
Attaching screw
Attaching screw
HRDY lamp
RDY lamp
CTRL lamp
COPY lamp
START/STOP switch
CN1 connector (for maintenance)
DIP switches for Vnet station address setting
Setting of domain number
Setting of station number
Figure Processor card : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-23
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Setting the Domain Number : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £A domain stands for a range of stations connected by a single train of the V net.
Set the domain number to a value from 1 to 16.
To set a domain number, set the DIP switches as follows.
Bits 2 and 3 must always be zeros (0s).
A060211E.EPS
ODDPARITY
00
MSB
LSB
DOMAINNo.
13
45
67
82
0 1
MSB: Most significant bitLSB: Least significant bit
Odd parity of domain number switches
Domain number of 5 bits
Always 0s
Figure Domain Number Setting Switches : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Table Domain Number and DIP Switch Positions : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Domain No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
A060212E.EPS
Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-24<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Setting the Station Number : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Set the station number to a value from 1 to 64. To set a station number, set the DIPswitches as follows.
13
45
67
82
A060213E.EPS
ODDPARITY
MSB
LSB
0 1
MSB: Most significant bitLSB: Least significant bit
STATIONNo.
Odd parity of station number switches
Station number
Figure Station Number Setting Switches : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Table Station Number and DIP Switch Positions : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Station No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Bit 8
Station No.
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
17 18 30 31 32 33 60 61 62 63 64
1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
A060214E.EPS
Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-25
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.7 RIO Bus Interface CardThe RIO bus interface card (RB301) performs data communication via the RIO buscoupler unit between multiple nodes connected on the RIO bus.
■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £
● Status Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS £
• HRDYLit in green if the RIO bus interface card hardware is normal; if not, is not lit.
• RDY:Lit in green only if both the hardware and software are normal.
• CTRL:Lit in green if the RIO card is in service for a duplexed FCU. Is not lit if in the stand-bymode. Always lit in green for a single-processor FCU.
HRDY
RDY
CTRL
A060215E.EPS
Attaching screw
Attaching screw
HRDY lamp
RDY lamp
CTRL lamp
Figure RIO Bus Interface Card : LFCS2/LFCS £
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
A6-26<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.8 ESB Bus Interface CardThe ESB bus interface card (SB301) performs data communication via the SB401on node unit for FIO between I/O modules.
■ Configuration : KFCS2/KFCS £
● Status Lamps : KFCS2/KFCS £
• RDY:Lit in green only if both the hardware and software are normal.
• CTRL:Lit in green if the SB301 is in service. Is not lit if in the stand-by mode.
A060216E.EPS
RDY lamp
CTRL lamp
CN1 connector
Figure ESB Bus Interface Card : KFCS2/KFCS £
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-27
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A6.2.9 V net Coupler UnitThe V net coupler unit the processor card installed in the FCU to the V net cable byperforming the signal isolation and signal level conversion.
■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £For a duplexed FCU, two V net coupler units for duplexed processor (AIP502) are installed.The upper connector is for bus 1, the lower for bus 2.
For a single-processor FCU, two V net coupler units for single processor (AIP501) areinstalled. The upper connector is for bus 1, the lower for bus 2.
● Status Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• RCV:Lit in green when receiving a communication carrier from the V net; is not lit in othercases.
• SND (for AIP501):Lit in green when sending data to the V net; is not lit in other cases.
• SND-L (for AIP502):Lit in green while the processor card in the left side of the FCU is sending data to the Vnet; is not lit in other cases.
• SND-R (for AIP502):Lit in green while the processor card in the right side of the FCU is sending data to theV net; is not lit in other cases.
When the communication switch is set to DSBL (disable), all lamps are off.
A060217E.EPS
AIP502 (for duplexed processor unit) AIP501 (for single processor unit)
RCV
SND
ENBL
DSBL
V Net
CN1
CN2
RCV
SND-L
SND-R
ENBL
DSBL
V Net
CN1
CN2
Attaching screw
Attaching screw
RCV lamp
SND-L lamp
SND-R lamp
Communication switch
Connector assembly
Figure V net Coupler Units : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
A6-28<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Setting Elements : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
● Communication Switch : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• ENBL:Enables the V net communication. Leave the switch in this position normally.
• DSBL :Disables the V net communication.This is a locking switch.To toggle the switch position, pull the switch lever to unlock it first.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-29
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.10 RIO Bus Coupler UnitThe RIO bus coupler unit couples the RIO bus interface card installed in the FCU tothe RIO bus by modulating and demodulating the signals.
■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS £For an FCU with duplexed RIO bus, two RIO bus coupler units (AIP511 or AIP512) areinstalled. On the left is for bus 1, and on the right for bus 2. For an FCU with single RIO bus,one RIO bus coupler unit (AIP511 or AIP512) is installed on the left (bus 1).
● Status Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS £
• RCV:The green lamp turns on when receiving a communication carrier from the RIO bus;otherwise, it turns off.
• SND (for AIP511):The green lamp turns on when sending data to the RIO bus; otherwise, it turns off.
• SND-L (for AIP512):The green lamp turns on while the RIO bus interface card in the left side of the FCU issending data to the RIO bus; otherwise, it turns off.
• SND-R (for AIP512):The green lamp turns on while the RIO bus interface card in the right side of the FCUis sending data to the RIO bus; otherwise, it turns off.
When the communication switch is set to DSBL (disable), all lamps will turn off.
RIO Bus
RCV
SNDDSBL
ENBLRIO Bus
RCV
SND-L
SND-R
ENBL
DSBL
AIP511 (for single processor unit. The difference from AIP512 is just the one SND lamp.)
AIP512 (for duplexed processor unit)
A060218E.ESP
Attaching screw
Attaching screw
RCV lampSND-L lampSND-R lamp
Communication switch
Connector unit
Figure RIO Bus Coupler Units : LFCS2/LFCS £
■ Setting Elements : LFCS2/LFCS £
● Communication Switch : LFCS2/LFCS £
This is a locking switch. To toggle the switch position, pull the switch lever to unlock it first.
For ENBL, toggle up; for DSBL, toggle down.
• ENBL (up):Enables the RIO bus communication. Leave the switch in this position normally.
• DSBL (down):Disables the RIO bus communication.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-30<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.11 ESB Bus Coupler UnitThe ESB bus coupler unit couples the ESB bus interface card installed in the FCU tothe ESB bus by modulating and demodulating the signals.
■ Configuration : KFCS2/KFCS £For an FCU with duplexed ESB bus, two ESB bus coupler units (AIP532) are installed. Onthe left is for bus 1, and on the right for bus 2. For an FCU with single ESB bus, one ESBbus coupler unit is installed on the left (bus 1).
● Status Lamps : KFCS2/KFCS £
• RCV:Lit in green when receiving a communication carrier from the ESB bus; is not lit inother cases.
• SND-LLit in green while the ESB bus interface card in the left side of the FCU is sending datato the ESB bus; is not lit in other cases.
• SND-RLit in green while the ESB bus interface card in the right side of the FCU is sendingdata to the ESB bus; is not lit in other cases.
When the communication switch is set to DSBL (disable), all lamps are off.
ESB BusCN1
RCV
SND-L
SND-R
REVISION
U H1 H2
Attaching screw
Attaching screw
RCV lampSND-L lampSND-R lamp
ESB bus cable connector
A060219E.EPS
Figure ESB Bus Coupler Units : KFCS2/KFCS £
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-31
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.12 External Interface Unit of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCSThe external interface unit outputs the result of the self-diagnostics by the proces-sor card to the contact output terminals.
An alarm lamp provided for each fan lights in red when the fan speed becomesabnormal.
■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £• READY terminals:
Open when the processor card fails (or both processor cards fail for a duplexed FCU)or when the power fails.
• FUSERL1: for the READY contact output relayRL2: for the fan speed control relaysN1: for the left fanN2: for the right fan
• LampsN1: Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of
the left fan.N2: Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of
the right fan.
FAN ALARM
FUSE
RL1 RL2
READY
TM1
N1 N2
A060220E.EPS
Fuse for relays
Fuse for fans
Fan status lamps
Contact output terminals
Attaching screws
Figure External Interface Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-32<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.13 External Interface Unit of LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSwith CabinetThe external interface unit outputs the result of the self-diagnostics by the proces-sor card to the contact output terminals on the power distribution board.
An alarm lamp provided for each of the FCU and door fans lights in red when the fanspeed becomes abnormal.
■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
● FUSE : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
RL1 : for the CPU READY contact relay
RL2 : for the fan speed control relays
RDY RLY : for the RL1 relay of the contact output unit on the main power distribution board
N1 : for the left FCU fan
N2 : for the right FCU fan
D1 : for the left fan on the front door
D2 : for the right fan on the front door
D3 : for the left fan on the rear door
D4 : for the right fan on the rear door
● Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
N1:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the left FCUfan.
N2:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the rightFCU fan.
D1:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the left fanon the front door.
D2:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the right fanon the front door
D3:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the left fanon the rear door
D4:Normally off. The red lamp turns on in case of failure or abnormal speed of the right fanon the rear door
FCU
FUSE
FL1 RL2 N1 N2 D1FAN ALARM
D2 D3 D4RDYRLY
CN3
FRONTDOOR
REARDOOR
Fuse for relays
Fuse for fans
Fan status lamps
Connector
Attaching screwsA060221E.EPS
Figure External Interface Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-33
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.14 Contact Output UnitThe contact output unit, which is provided inside the cabinet for an LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet, receives the CPU ready signal via the external interfaceunit and outputs from the READY terminals.
It also distributes the power supply to the fans on the front and rear doors, andsends the speed status signals output from the fans to the processor via the exter-nal interface unit.
■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £• RL1 relay: Interposing relay for CPU ready signal
Rated voltage: 250 V AC, 30 V DCRated current: 2 ARated power: 125 VA
• READY terminals:Single-pole double-throw; both the normal-open (NC-C) and normal-close contacts(NO-C) are available for a failure of the power supply unit (failures of processor cardson both sides, or failure of power supply units on both sides for a duplexed FCU). Usea surge absorber when connecting a relay to the READY terminals in order to elimi-nate surge noise.
• CN1 connector:Distributes the power to the fan unit on the rear door and sends the fan speed signalsto the processor.
• CN2 connector:Distributes the power to the fan unit on the front door and sends the fan speed signalsas well as the suction and exhaust air temperature signals to the processor.
• CN3 connector:Connected to the external interface unit of the FCU by a system cable.
A060222E.EPS
CN1: Power supply connector for rear-door fan unit
CN2: Power supply connector for front-door fan unit
CN3: Connector for external interface unit
READY output terminals
RL1 relay
Figure Contact Output Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A6-34<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.15 Fan UnitsUsed to suppress an increase of the temperature inside the cabinet and prevent atemperature increase from causing malfunctions and faster deterioration of theparts in the FCU and nodes.
The fan has two speeds; the high speed is set in the following cases:
• When the suction air temperature increases beyond 35 deg C
• When the exhaust air temperature increases beyond 40 deg C
• When any one of the nest fans and door fans is stopped or the speed of any one fanbecomes abnormal.
If a fan speed drops due to a failure, the corresponding fan status lamp on the externalinterface unit lights in red.
■ Configuration : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Two nest fan units are installed beneath the FCU (rack mountable type LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS).
Two fan units are installed on each of the front and rear doors (LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet).
Air flow direction
A060223E.EPS
1
Nest Fan Unit (no difference from a door fan unit)
Figure Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-35
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.16 ESB Bus Interface Master Module (with SOE Interface)ESB Bus Interface Master Module (Model SB311) can be installed in FCU. Thismodule is provided with SOE (Sequence Of Events) capability. This module has theinterfaces that support EN-Bus, ESB-Bus, Ethernet, RS-422 (for IRIG-B code input)and RS-232C port (for maintenance). This module can be applied when accessingfrom FCU host CPU to FIO and performs as a communication master when access-ing from SOE server to FIO. However, SB311 can be applied only in AFS30D,AFG30D, AFS40D and AFG40 stations.
■ Configuration: KFCS2/KFCS £
● Status Lamps: KFCS2/KFCS £
• RDY:The green light turns on when SB311 is in normal status. Otherwise the light turns off.
• CTRL:The green light turns on when SB311 is the control module in dual-redundant configu-ration. If the SB311 is the standby module, the light turns off.
• SRDY:The green light turns on when SB311 is handling SOE signals. Otherwise the lightturns off.
• LINK:The green light turns on when Ethernet link is established.
• ACT:The green light turns on when frames are active on Ethernet. Otherwise the light turnsoff.
• SYNC:The green light turns on when external clock signal is used. Otherwise the light turnsoff.
● Connectors: KFCS2/KFCS £
• CN1: Ethernet communication for SOE master.
• CN2: For maintenance.
• CN3: For eternal clock signal.
● DIP Switches: KFCS2/KFCS £
For setting the IP address and synchronization mode.
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
A6-36<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
SYNC
CN3
CN2
CN1
RDYCTRL
SRDY
LINKACT
RDY lamp
CTRL lamp
SRDY lamp
SYNC lamp
LINK lamp
ACT lamp
CN1 connector(For Ethernet communication)
CN2 connector(For maintenance)
CN3 connector(For IRIG-B code input)
DIP switch(For setting IP address and synchronization mode)
A060224E.EPS
Figure SB311 Card : KFCS2/KFCS £
SEE ALSO
For more information about SOE capability of SB311, see the following:
M11, “SEM (Sequence of Events Manager) Function” in Part M “Options” of Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E).
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-37
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Setting IP Address : KFCS2/KFCS £When using SB311, the IP address needs to be set.
• The IP address can be set using the front DIP switches.
• A private address should be reserved beforehand.
• Two types, A and B, of addresses need to be prepared. Though the two addresseshave the same usage, they can be used for different users. (For an example, the left-hand side SB311 uses A address and right-hand side SB311 uses B address.)
Table Setting IP Address : KFCS2/KFCS £
A060225.EPS
Bit Number Description Setting on SB311
1
2
3
4
5 to 8
Parity for Bit 2 to 8The number of bits at 1 position should be anodd number.
Unused Always 0
Private 0 stands for Private
Private Address A or BLeft and right in the same station.0 : Private address A for left-hand side. 1 : Private address B for right-hand side.
Lower 4 bits for IP address Lower 4 bits for IP address
A060226E.EPS
12
34
56
78
1
2
4
8
0 1
PARITY
LOWER
A B
PRIVATE
SEL
bit 4 : Set this bit to 0 on left-hand side SB311 Set this bit to 1 on right-hand side SB311 5 to 8: IP address setting
Figure DIP switches Positions : KFCS2/KFCS £
This figure indicates how to use bits 5 to 8 of the DIP switches to set the IP address into192.168.0.20. The setting becomes valid only after the interface unit is restarted.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-38<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
DIP switches positions are listed in the following tables. The required IP address can be setwith these dipswitches accordingly.
Table IP Addresses and Positions of DIP switches : KFCS2/KFCS £
SW11
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
SW3
A060227E.EPS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Private Address A
Private Address A
Private Address A
Private Address A
Private Address A
Private Address A
Private Address A
Private Address A
Private Address A
Private Address A
Private Address B
PA
RIT
Y
Alw
ays
0SW2
Address Bits
DIP SW Positions
SW4 SW5 SW7SW6 SW8
P/U A/B 8 4 2 1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Private Address B
Private Address B
Private Address B
Private Address B
Private Address B
Private Address B
Private Address B
Private Address B
Private Address B
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
192. 168. 0. 16
192. 168. 0. 17
192. 168. 0. 18
192. 168. 0. 19
192. 168. 0. 20
192. 168. 0. 21
192. 168. 0. 22
192. 168. 0. 23
192. 168. 0. 24
192. 168. 0. 25
192. 168. 0. 144
192. 168. 0. 145
192. 168. 0. 146
192. 168. 0. 147
192. 168. 0. 148
192. 168. 0. 149
192. 168. 0. 150
192. 168. 0. 151
192. 168. 0. 152
192. 168. 0. 153
1 1 0 Private Address A
0 1 0 Private Address B
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
192. 168. 0. 26
192. 168. 0. 154
0 1 1 Private Address A
1 1 1 Private Address B
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
192. 168. 0. 27
192. 168. 0. 155
1 1 0 Private Address A
0 1 0 Private Address B
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
192. 168. 0. 28
192. 168. 0. 156
0 1 1 Private Address A
1 1 1 Private Address B
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
192. 168. 0. 29
192. 168. 0. 157
0 1 0 Private Address A
1 1 0 Private Address B
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
192. 168. 0. 30
192. 168. 0. 158
1 1 1 Private Address A
0 1 1 Private Address B
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
192. 168. 0. 31
192. 168. 0. 159
Type IP Address
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-39
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.2.17 IRIG-B CouplerIRIG-B Coupler (component number S9039FA) can be installed in FCU. This compo-nent is used for linking SB311 card to external clock and other FCSs. IRIG-B coupleris necessary when using SB311 card.
■ Composition of IRIG-B Coupler
● Connectors
• CN1: For connecting to CN3 connector of the SB311 card installed to the left-handside of FCU.
• CN2: For connecting to CN3 connector of the SB311 card installed to the right-handside of FCU.
● Terminal Blocks
• TM1(1,2) : For connecting to other FCS. If the coupler is at the end of the connectioncable, a termination resister YCB128 should be connected.
• TM1(4,5) : For connecting to external clock signal (GPS unit) or other FCS.
• TM1(3,6) : For connecting to SG (Signal Ground).
CN1 CN2 TM1
TM1RX+ RX- SG
RX+ RX- SG
1 2 3
4 5 6
CN1 connector CN2 connector TerminalA060228E.EPS
Figure IRIG-B Coupler (Component Number S9039FA)
SEE ALSO
For more information about IRIG-B coupler, see the following :
M11.2.1, “Hardware Setup” in Part M “Options” of Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E).
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007ß-00
A6-40<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.3 Configuration and Functions of Each Unit inFFCSIn this chapter, settings, displays and the capabilities of the modules and unitsconfigured for a field control unit are explained.
• External Interface Unit
• Power Supply Module
• Processor Module
• V net Coupler Unit
• ESB Bus Coupler Module (EC401)
• ESB Bus Interface Module (SB401)
• ER Bus Interface Master Module (EB401)
• ER Bus Interface Slave Module (EB501)
10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-41
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.3.1 External Interface UnitThe external interface unit has terminals for connecting the specified power supply,and distributes the power through the output connectors.
■ Configuration : FFCS £The field control unit does not have power switch to turn the power supply on or off.
It is recommended to prepare a separate switch or breaker.
When removing the power output connectors (CN1 or CN2) from the external interface unit,the power supply can be severed.
A060301E.EPS
TM1READY
FUSE RL1 CN1 (PSU-L) TM2 100-120V AC � L N
CN2 (PSU-R)
Fuse for relay power
Contact output terminals
Power input terminals
Power output connectors
Figure External Interface Unit : FFCS £
● Power Input Terminals : FFCS £
These terminals are used to connect the power supply cables.
• L(+) : Line
• N(-) : Neutral
● CN1 Connector : FFCS £
This is a connector for power output, for connecting the cable of the left side power unit.
● CN2 Connector : FFCS £
This is a connector for power output, for connecting the cable of the right side power unit.
● READY Contact Output (TM1; M4 Screw) : FFCS £
Provides an open signal when the processor module (both modules if dual-redundantlyconfigured) becomes abnormal or power supply fails.
● Fuse : FFCS £
The fuse for the power supply of READY output relay.
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A6-42<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
A6.3.2 Power Supply ModuleA power supply module is connected to a 100 to 120V AC or 220 to 240V AC or 24VDC main source and supplies insulated +5V and +24V to each installed I/O modulethrough the back board. The +5V and +24V outputs support dual-redundant insu-lated output operation.
■ Configuration : FFCS £
A060302E.EPS
Power supply module
LN
Power supply input terminal (AC)
Grounding terminal
Check terminal
Status lamp
Power supply input terminal (24V DC)�
�
POWER
CHECK
GND
+5V
+24V
SYS
FLD
Figure Power Supply Module : FFCS £
● Power Input Terminal : FFCS £
This terminal receives the specified power supply voltage. It is delivered with a powersupply cable attached.
• L (�) : Line
• N (�) : Neutral
• Grounding terminal: For grounding
SEE ALSO
For more information about removing power supply module,see the following:
“■ Relpacing Power Supply Module : FFCS £” in A7.5.1, Replacing Common Modules
● Status LEDs : FFCS £
• SYS : The lamp is ON when +5V is output properly. Otherwise, the lamp is OFF.
• FLD : The lamp is ON when +24V is output properly. Otherwise, the lamp is OFF.
● Check Terminals : FFCS £
It is possible to measure output voltages of +5V DC and +24V DC using these terminals formaintenance purposes.
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-43
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6.3.3 Processor ModuleControl algorism calculations are performed in the processor modules.
The processor module has diagnostic capability, when the CPU or power supplyencounters abnormalities, a signal can be output through external interface unit.
■ Configuration : FFCS £The appearance of the processor module, front and rear, is illustrated in the drawing below.
The battery is placed behind the front cover.
The DIP switches for setting domain number and station number are placed at the rear ofthe module. Thus the setting can only be performed by pulling out the module from its slot.
RCV 1 2SND 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8HRDY RDY CTRL COPY
BUS1
BUS2
START/STOPSTART
/STOP BATTERY
BATTERY
ON
OFF
PORT
DOMST A
CN1
CN2
RCV 1 2SND 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8HRDY RDY CTRL COPY
BUS1
BUS2
ON
OFF
10
P
A060303E.EPS
START/STOP switch
Maintenance connector
V net station number setting switch
For domain number
For station number
Rear
V net connectorBus 1
V net connectorBus 2
Battery
LED display
Front Behind front cover
Battery ON/OFF switch
Battery life label
Front setting switch(6-bit dipswitch)
BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)
2007.10
ON OFF
DO
MA
IN N
O.
STA
TIO
N N
O.
00
MS
BL
SB
PM
SB
LS
B
Figure Processor Module Overview : FFCS £
A6-44<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
● Battery Unit : FFCS £
The battery unit is used for backing up the main memory of the processor module whenpower failure occurs.
CAUTION
Use batteries specified by Yokogawa Electric.
The part number of battery pack is S9129FA.
A label indicating the expiration date of the battery sticks on the lower part of the processormodule front cover. This expiration date is valid when the ambient temperature is less than30 degree Celsius.
SEE ALSO
For how to replace the battery unit, see the following.
“ ■ Replacing Battery : FFCS £” in A7.5.4, How to replace Parts
● Battery Back-up Specifications : FFCS £
• Backup time : Up to 72 hours
• Battery life : Varies depending on ambient temperature3 years at 30 deg C or less1.5 years at 40 deg C or less9 months at 50 deg C or less
BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)
2007.10 Date of battery life
A060304E.EPS
Figure Battery Life Label : FFCS £
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-45
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
● Status Lamps : FFCS £
RCV 1 2SND 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8HRDY RDY CTRL COPY
A060305E.EPSHRDY lamp
RDY lampCTRL lampCOPY lamp
STATUS lamp
RCV lampSND lamp
Figure LED Display : FFCS £
• HRDY:The processor module performs self diagnosis. If the processor module hardware isfunctioning normally, the green light turns on. If abnormality is found, the light turns off.
• RDY:The green light turns on if both the hardware and software are functioning normally. Ifeither of them is abnormal, the light turns off.
• CTRL:In the duplex FFCS, the green light turns on if the processor module is the control sideand turns off if it is the standby side. When starting up the duplex FFCS, the right sidebecomes the control side. In the non-redundant FFCS, the green light is always on.
• COPY:In the duplexed FFCS, the green light turns on when program copy is executed andturns off when program copy is completed.When a processor module has been replaced or when the unit is stopped then startedagain, the standby-side processor module automatically copies the program of thecontrol-side processor module. When copy is completed, the light turns off.In the non-redundant FFCS, the light is always off.
• RCV:
Indicates V net communication status. 1 stands for V net bus1 while 2 stands for V netbus2. When receiving communication frames, the green lamp turns on, otherwise thelamp turns off.
• SND:
Indicates V net communication status. 1 stands for V net bus1 while 2 stands for V netbus2. When sending communication frames, the green lamp turns on, otherwise thelamp turns off.
• STATUS(1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8):
Indicates the processor module status.
Normal : All lamps are off
DOMN : Indicates V net domain number
STA : Indicates V net station number
A6-46<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
● Switch : FFCS £
START/STOP
BATTERYON
OFF
PORT
DOMNST A
CN1
A060306E.EPS
START/STOP switch
Maintenance connector
Battery ON/OFF switch
Front setting switch(6-bit DIP switch)
ON OFF
Figure Setting Switch : FFCS £
• START/STOP:This maintenance switch is used for forcing stop or restarting the processor moduleCPU.If this switch is pressed when the processor module is still operating, the CPU willstop.If this switch is pressed when the processor module is not operating, the CPU willrestart.This switch is located inside a hole next to the START/STOP sign.Push the switch using a non conductive slender bar of around 2 mm in diameter.
• Battery ON/OFF switch:Selects whether to back up the contents of the main memory in the processor moduleduring a power failure.ON: Enables the backup. Select this position during normal operation.OFF: Disables the backup. The backup time provided by the battery is up to 72
hours. When shutting down the power supply for more than 72 hours, setthe switch to OFF to avoid draining the battery.
• Front setting (6-bit DIP switch)
PORT: Port for maintenance (In general, set to 0 position).
DOMN: Indicates V net domain number on STATUS lamp when this bit is set to 1position. (In general, set to OFF position).
STA: Indicates V net station number on STATUS lamp when this bit is set to 1position. (In general, set to OFF position).
An example of STATUS LED indication:
If V net domain number or V net station number is set as 5 (10000101).
A060307E.EPS
1
P (MSB) (LSB)
0
1
82 3 4 5 6 7
1 86
If the domain number is set as shown in the right side figure, the lamp displays as follows (the numbered bits are lit):
Figure STATUS Lamp Indication : FFCS £
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-47
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
■ Setting the Domain Number : FFCS £A domain stands for a range of stations connected by a single train of the V net.
Set the domain number to a value from 1 to 16.
To set a domain number, set the DIP switches as follows.
Bits 2 and 3 must always be zeros (0s).
A060308E.EPS
P0
0M
SB
LSB
Domain number (5 bits)
0 1
Fixed to 0 (2 bits)
Parity of the domain number (1 bit) (odd parity)
MSB: Most Significant BitLSB: Least Significant Bit
Figure Domain Number Setting Switches : FFCS £
Table Domain Number and DIP Switch Positions : FFCS £
Domain number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
A060309E.EPS
Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.
A6-48<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
■ Setting the Station Number : FFCS £Set the station number to a value from 1 to 64. To set a station number, set the DIPswitches as follows.
A060310E.EPS
Station number (7 bit)
Station number parity (1 bit) (odd parity)
MSB : Most Significant Bit (highest-order bit)LSB : Least Significant Bit (lowest-order bit)
PM
SB
LSB
0 1
Figure Station Number Setting Switches : FFCS £
Table Station Number and DIP Switch Positions : FFCS £
Station number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Bit 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bit 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Bit 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 6 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 7 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Bit 8 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Station number 17 18 30 31 32 33 60 61 62 63 64
Bit 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
Bit 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 4 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Bit 7 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
Bit 8 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0A060311E.EPS
Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-49
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A6.3.4 V net Coupler UnitThe V net coupler unit the processor module installed in the FFCS to the V net cableby performing the signal isolation and signal level conversion.
For a duplexed FFCS, two V net coupler units are installed.
A060312E.EPS
CN2(CPU-L)
CN3(CPU-R)
CN1 ENBL
DSBL
Communication switch
Figure V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £
● Communication Switch : FFCS £
• ENBL (up):Enables the V net communication. Leave the switch in this position normally.
• DSBL (down):Disables the V net communication.
This is a locking switch.To toggle the switch position, pull the switch lever to unlock it first.
A6-50<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A6.3.5 ESB Bus Coupler ModuleESB bus coupler module (Model: EC401) is installed in field control unit and used forcommunicating with the ESB bus interface module (Model: SB401) of local node.This module has one ESB bus port. Dual-redundant bus schemes can be configuredwith the two modules.
■ Configuration : FFCS £
A060313E.EPS
LED display(RCV, SND)
ESB bus connector
EC401
RCV SND
Figure EC401 : FFCS £
● LED Display : FFCS £
• RCV: When receiving ESB bus communication frames from node units, the lampflashes, otherwise the lamp is off.
• SND: When sending ESB bus communication frames to node units, the lamp flashes,otherwise the lamp is off.
● ESB Bus Connector : FFCS £
The ESB bus connector is connected to an ESB bus branch connector shown as thefollowing figure.
ESB bus cable (YCB301) is connected to ESB bus branch connector. ESB bus couplermodule is placed at the end of the ESB bus so that the branch connector with terminatorshould be used.
A060314E.EPS
Connector unit with terminator for ESB bus
ESB bus cable connector
Figure ESB bus Branch Connector : FFCS £
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-51
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.3.6 ESB Bus Interface Module (SB401)The SB401 module is the communication module installed on local nodes. It com-municates with an ESB bus coupler module (EC401).
SB401 has one port for an ESB bus; dual-redundant bus operation can be supportedby installing two modules.
■ Configuration : FFCS £
A060315E.EPS
ESB bus address settingDIP switch
LED display(STATUS, SEL, RSP)
ESB bus connector
Figure SB401 : FFCS £
● LED Display : FFCS £
• STATUS : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normallyand the ESB interface is operating normally, otherwise it is turned off.
• SEL : This LED turns on during data transmission to an I/O module, otherwise it isturned off.
• RSP : This LED turns on during data reception from an I/O module, otherwise it isturned off.
● ESB Bus Connector : FFCS £
The ESB bus connector is connected to an ESB bus branch connector, shown in the figurebelow, via an ESB bus cable (YCB301). At the end of the ESB bus connect the ESB buscable connector to a branch connector with terminator to terminate the ESB bus.
A060316E.EPS
Branch connector for ESB bus
Branch connector with Terminator for ESB bus
Figure ESB bus Branch Connector : FFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-52<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
IMPORTANT
When connecting or disconnecting the ESB bus branch connector for a dual-redundantnode unit, make sure the bus 1 and bus 2 are correctly identified and connected.
● ESB Bus Address Setting DIP Switches : FFCS £
When multiple node units are connected to an ESB bus, it is possible to select a node unitto be accessed by setting the node address using these switches.
■ Setting Node Addresses : FFCS £The node addresses on the ESB bus are set using the node address setting switch.
Node numbers on the CENTUM CS 3000 system must be designated in the range from 2to 4.
Node number 1 is reserved for the field control unit.
It is possible to match the required node numbers by setting the DIP switches as shownbelow.
A060317E.EPS
65
43
21
(LSB)
(MSB)
Fixed to 0
MSB : Most Significant BitLSB : Least Significant Bit
Node address parity (1 bit, odd parity)
10
Node address (4 bits)
Figure Node Number Setting DIP Switches : FFCS £
Table Node Number and Switch Positions : FFCS £
Node number 2 3 4
Bit 1 0 1 0
Bit 2 0 0 0
Bit 3 0 0 0
Bit 4 0 0 1
Bit 5 1 1 0
Bit 6 0 1 0
A060318E.EPS1 : ON 0 : OFF
Setting DIP switches0: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward left.1: From the state shown in the above figure, the switch is tilted toward right.
10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-53
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.3.7 ER Bus Interface Master Module (EB401)The EB401 module is used for controlling the ER bus communication. It provides ERbus interface functions for communication between node units.
EB401 has one 10BASE-2 port; it is possible to make the ER bus dual-redundant byinstalling two modules.
■ Configuration : FFCS £
A060319E.EPS
RCV 1SND 1
DXACTSTATUS
CN1
LED display(from the top RCV, SND)(from the left STATUS, ACT, DX)
ER bus cable connector (CN1)
Figure EB401 : FFCS £
● LED Display : FFCS £
• STATUS : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normallyand the hardware is ready, otherwise it is turned off.
• ACT : When the module is taking control, the lamp turns on. When the module isstandby, the lamp turns off.
• DX : This LED turns on when EB401 is configured for dual-redundant operation,otherwise it turns off.
• SND 1 : This LED turns on during data transmission, otherwise it turns off (it is onlythe "1" digit that actually turns on and off).
• RCV 1 : This LED turns on during data reception, otherwise it turns off (it is only the"1" digit that actually turns on and off).
● ER Bus Cable Connector : FFCS £
This is a 10BASE-2 type BNC connector. It communicates with an EB501 module on theslave side.
CAUTION
• When connecting or disconnecting the ER bus T-type connector for a dual-redundantnode unit, make sure the bus 1 and bus 2 are correctly identified and connected.
• EB401 can not be installed to remote nodes (ANR10S, ANR10D).
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A6-54<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A6.3.8 ER Bus Interface Slave Module (EB501)The EB501 module is installed on the remote node side and communicates with anER bus interface master module (EB401) of a local node.
EB501 has one 10BASE-2 port; dual-redundant bus operation can be supported byinstalling two modules.
■ Configuration : FFCS £
IP bus address settingDIP switch
Connector for maintenance
LED display(from the left STATUS, SND, RCV)
ER bus cable connector
A060320E.EPS
Figure EB501 : FFCS £
● LED Display : FFCS £
• STATUS : This LED turns on when the self-diagnosis has been completed normallyand the EB501 module is operating normally, otherwise it turns off.Note that the STATUS LED of an EB501 with wide temperature rangespecification flashes until the operation temperature of the LAN controllerreaches 0 deg. C or higher.
• SND : This LED turns on during data transmission, otherwise it turns off.
• RCV : This LED turns on during data reception, otherwise it turns off.
● ER Bus Cable Connector : FFCS £
This is a BNC connector equivalent to 10BASE-2. It communicates with an EB401 moduleon the master side via Ethernet.
● IP Bus Address Setting DIP Switches : FFCS £
For setting IP address of EB501. The IP address of EB501 is the same as the node numberof EB501.
● Connector for Maintenance : FFCS £
This connector is used for maintenance.
CAUTION
When connecting or disconnecting the ER bus T-type connector for a dual-redundant nodeunit, make sure the bus 1 and bus 2 are correctly identified and connected.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A6. Functions of Each Unit in FCS> A6-55
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Setting Node Number : FFCS £In order to use a bus interface module, it is necessary to set the module's “Node Number”.
• “Node Number” can be set by the DIP switches on the front surface of the EB501module.
• Both pre-defined private addresses and user addresses that the user can set freelyare provided.
• Two types of address, A and B, are available. (It is necessary to use either type A or Bconsistently in the same network segment.)
Table Setting IP Address : FFCS £
Bit Number Description
1
2 Unused
5 to 8 IP address (4 bits)
3
4
Parity of pin 2 to pin 8
Private IP / User IP
IP 1 or 2
Always set to 0.
Set 0 if EB501 is on left side, Set 1 if EB501 is on right side.
Node number
The number of 1 among the 8 DIP switches should be an odd number.
EB501 Setting
Private IP: 0
A060321E.EPS
A060322E.EPS
12
34
56
78
1
2
4
8
0 1
PARITY
UPPER
LOWER
A B
USERPRIVATE
SEL
bit 3 : Fixed to 0 (private address) 4 : Set this bit to 0 if EB501 is installed on the left side and 1 if EB501 is installed on the right side. 5 to 8 : Use these bits to specify an individual node number.
(An Example Where the Address “Node Number” 4, left EB501 is Set)
Figure IP Address Setting DIP Switches : FFCS £
Set the address of lower 4 bits using bit numbers 5 to 8.
The settings become valid only after the remote node is restarted.
It is possible to match the required “Node Number” by setting the DIP switches as shownbelow.
Table Node Number and Positions of Setting Switches : FFCS £
DIP Switch setting
SW1
0
1
0
SW3
A060323E.EPS
0
0
0
0
1
0
Private address A
Private address A
Private address A
PA
RIT
Y
SW2 SW4 SW5 SW7SW6 SW8
Lower address
Vac
ant
P/U A/B 8 4 2 1Address selected
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
Private address B
Private address B
Private address B
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Node number
2 (left EB501)
3 (left EB501)
4 (left EB501)
2 (right EB501)
3 (right EB501)
4 (right EB501)
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
Blank Page
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7. Maintenance of FCSThis chapter describes the maintenance precautions and procedures for an FCS,including:
• Indications of abnormalities
• Daily inspections
• Procedures for replacing parts having a limited life that must be replaced, andparts that can be replaced by the user
• Procedure for replacing each unit
CAUTION
• If dust or dirt is found in peripheral devices, clean with a vacuum cleaner or dry softcloth. If the stain is tough and cannot be removed easily, wipe with soft cloth soaked inwater or mild soap water after wringing it tightly.
• When power is ON, do not install or remove the cards, cables, connectors not listed inthis manual.
• During maintenance, put up wrist strap, and take other ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)measures.
• Opening a cabinet door during operation increases the radiation noise; immunityagainst the radiation noise cannot be guaranteed.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-2<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.1 Precautions for MaintenanceThis section describes the general precautions for maintaining the FCS hardware.
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-3
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.1.1 Precautions for Static ElectricityNote the following to prevent faults due to static electricity:
• When storing or carrying a maintenance part, put it in an anti-static bag. (Such partsare packed in anti-static bags with a label describing precautions for static electricity,when delivered.)
• During maintenance, wear a wrist strap with grounding wire and ground the wire via a1 M ohm resistor.
• When placing a card with a built-in battery (power supply unit) on a conductive sheet,set the battery switch to OFF or remove the battery.
• When carrying out maintenance at a desk; 1) do it on a conductive sheet that isgrounded via a 1 M ohm resistor, 2) wear a wrist strap, and 3) keep away things whichmay be charged, such as plastic.
• Do not touch maintenance parts without first putting on a wrist strap and placing theparts on a conductive sheet.
• The wrist strap and conductive sheet are available from Yokogawa’s sales agents.
A070101E.EPS
Terminal or un-coated part of cabinet which is grounded
Wrist strap
1M ohm
1M ohm
Wrist strap
Conductive sheet
Grounding resistance of 1 M ohm
When working with a card with battery (powersupply unit) on a conductive sheet, set the BATTERY ON/OFF switch to the OFF positionor remove the battery
Figure How to Handle Cards and Modules
10th Edition : Mar.31,2005-00
A7-4<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.2 Daily MaintenanceA human interface station (HIS) always monitors the status of each FCS, and uponoccurrence of and recovery from a failure of an FCS, a HIS announces it to the userwith a buzzer sound and display message.
This section describes the daily maintenance for an FCS.
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-5
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.2.1 Inspection Using FCS Status Display WindowWith FCS status display window of HIS, the operating status of FCS can be checked.
■ FCS Status Display WindowSelect the FCS status display window from a system maintenance window. The controlstation operating status, I/O module status, communication bus status, and other statusescan be checked using the FCS status display window.
We recommend that this window be used not only when trouble occurs, but also to periodi-cally check the operating status of each station.
The figure below shows an example of PFCS status display window.
FCS101Distillation column AStation No : 1 Type : PFCD-E
Revision : R3.08.00Generation : 10/28/2007 20: 57
CPU Idle Time : 57secComn Load Ave : 0% Cur : 0%Test Mode : OFFControlStatus : RUN
I/O (OFF) : Comm I/O : ON
Task Status : Task1 : RUN Task2 : RUN Task3 : RUN Task4 : RUN
AAM10AAM50AAM11AAM11AAM21AAM51APM11AAM10AAM50AAM11AAM11AAM21AAM51APM11AAM10AAM50
21
ADM11C
ADM11C
ADM51C
ADM51C
4
ADM12T
ADM12T
3
ACM11
COM
ACM12
5
AUT
CPU
CPU
PSU
PSU
Not ReadyStand-ByControlHard ReadyMaintenance
MYPJT Domain : 01 VL net1 VL net2
.SF FCS0101 FCS Status DisplayFCS
IOMFCS
READY
A070201E.EPS
I/O moduleVL net statusNormal:Abnormal:
(green)(red)
Digital I/O module (connector type)
Start condition
CPU statusFlashes whiteduring CPU copying
Power supply statusDigital I/O module(terminal type)Communication error
Communication module
I/O module error
Figure PFCS Status Display Window ¡
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-6<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A7.2.2 Check of Status Indication Lamps : PFCS/SFCSWith status indication lamps of processor cards, power supply units and control buscoupler, the operation status of each unit can be checked.
■ Status Indication Lamps : PFCS/SFCSProcessor cards, power supply units and control bus coupler in a PFCS/SFCS have statusindication lamps, which represent the operation statuses of the units themselves.
The figure below shows a fully-configured PFCD with an extension rack.
A070202E.EPS
Power supply unit
Processor card
Control bus coupler
Figure Units Having Status Indication Lamp in PFCS/SFCS
SEE ALSO
• For the positions of the lamps on a processor card, see the following:
A6.1.4, “Processor card of PFCS/SFCS”
• If a status indication lamp of a unit fails, contact Yokogawa’s sales agents and take appropriate action.
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-7
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
The table below shows the types and meaning of the status lamps on the PFCS/SFCSprocessor cards, power supply units and control bus couplers.
Table The Status Lamps : PFCS/SFCS
Unit name Type of lamp When lamp turn on When lamp turn off Remarks
Processor card
HRDY Normal Abnormal Indicates the card hardware status.
RDY Normal Abnormal or no program Indicates the card status.
CTRL Control status Wait state or abnornalFor dual-redundant FCS, only the lampof one unit comes on.
COPY Copying Normal state Comes only when copying. Normally off.
Power supply unit RDY Normal Abnormal Indicates unit normal output state.
Control bus coupler
RCV Receive Not receiveIn the normal communication state, thelamp is on.
SND-L Send Wait In the communication state, one of thelamps come on.SND-R Send Wait
A070203E.EPS
A7-8<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.2.3 Check of Status Indication Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSThe power supply unit, processor card, RIO bus interface card, V net coupler unit,RIO bus coupler unit, external interface card of LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS havestatus indication lamps to show if the operation status of each unit is normal.
■ Status Indication Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS £Each unit and card in an LFCS2/LFCS has status indication lamp(s) which are lit in green(or blinking for a lamp indicating the communication status) when power is supplied to theunit or card, and the unit or card is operating normally. The figure below shows the locationsof the lamps on the AFS20D, for example. The meaning of each lamp status is summarizedin the table on the next page. Lamp names marked with (*3) in the table indicate the lampsthat are not found on AFS10S/AFG10S and AFS10D/AFG10D. Others are common to alleight models (AFS10S/AFG10S, AFS10D/AFG10D, AFS20S/AFG20S, and AFS20D/AFG20D).
A070204E.EPS
Power supply unitsRIO bus interface cardsProcessor cards
External interface unit
V net coupler units
RIO bus coupler units
Figure Units and Cards Having Status Indication Lamp : LFCS2/LFCS £
■ Status Indication Lamps : KFCS2/KFCS £Each unit and card in an KFCS2/KFCS has status indication lamp(s) which are lit in green(or blinking for a lamp indicating the communication status) when power is supplied to theunit or card, and the unit or card is operating normally. The figure above shows the loca-tions of the lamps. However, the ESB bus card is at the location of RIO bus card while theESB bus coupler is at the location of RIO bus coupler. The meaning of each lamp status issummarized in the table on the next page.
Lamp names marked with (*3) in the table indicate the lamps that are not found onAFS30S/AFG30S and AFS30D/AFG30D. Others are common to all cards and units.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-9
IM 33Q06C20-01E
SEE ALSO
For more information about lamp status on the units or cards, see the following:
“A6.2 Function of Each Unit in LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS”
If a status indication lamp of a unit fails, contact Yokogawa’s sales agents and appropriate action.
Table Lamp Status : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Unit or Card Lamp Name On Off Remarks
Power supply unit RDY Normal Failed Indicates the unit status.
Processor card
HRDY Normal Failed Indicates the hardware status of the card.
RDY Normal Failed Indicates the card status.
CTRL In service Stand-by Lit for either processor card in a duplexed FCU.
COPY Program copy Normal Lit only while the program is being copied; normally off.
RIO bus interface card (*1)
HRDY Normal Failed Indicates the hardware status of the card.
RDY Normal Failed Indicates the card status.
CTRL During communication Stand-by Lit for either RIO bus interface card in a duplexed FCU.
V net coupler unit
RCV Receiving Not receiving Lit when communication is normal.
SND Normal (on) Failed Lit when communication is normal.
SND-L Normal (on) Stand-byNormal when either lamp is lit.
SND-R Normal (on) Stand-by
RIO bus coupler unit (*1)
RCV Receiving Not receiving Lit when communication is normal.
SND Normal (on) Failed Lit when communication is normal.
SND-L Normal (on) Stand-byNormal when either lamp is lit.
SND-R Normal (on) Stand-by
External interface unit
N1 Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal
N2 Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.
D1 (*3) Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.
D2 (*3) Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.
D3 (*3) Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.
D4 (*3) Failed Normal Lit in red when the fan speed is abnormal.
Failed Indicates the SB311 status.
Stand-by Lit for either SB311 in a duplexed FCU.
SOE out service
Lit when SOE is in service.
LINK not Established
The green light turns on when LINK is established.
InactiveThe green light turns on when frames are active on Ethernet.
Asynchro-nous
The green light turns on when external clock signal is used.
A070205E.EPS
ESB bus coupler unit (*2)
RCV Receiving Not receiving Lit when communication is normal.
SND-L Normal (on) Stand-byNormal when either lamp is lit.
SND-R Normal (on) Stand-by
ESB bus interface master module (with SOE interface )(*4)
RDY Normal
CTRL In service
SRDY SOE in service
LINK LINK established
ACT Active
SYNC Synchronous
ESB bus interface card (*2)
RDY Normal Failed Indicates the card status.
CTRL During communication Stand-by Lit for either ESB bus interface card in a duplexed FCU.
*1: In case of LFCS2/LFCS*2: In case of KFCS2/KFCS*3: Lamps of the fuses for door fans of the AFS20S/AFG20S, AFS20D/AFG20D, AFS40S/AFG40S and AFS40D/AFG40D.*4: For Models AFS30D, AFG30D, AFS40D and AFG40D.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-10<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
A7.2.4 Inspection by FFCS Status Display WindowWith FFCS status display window of HIS, the operating status of FFCS can bechecked.
■ FFCS Statsu Display Window : FFCS £The FFCS status display window can be displayed from the System Maintenance windowof a Human Interface Station (HIS). It is possible to check the operation status of a controlstation, the status of the I/O modules, and the status of the communication buses in thenetwork via the FFCS status display window.
It is recommended to check this window periodically, not only when troubles occur, toinspect the operation status of each station.
The figure below shows an example of a FFCS status display window.
FCS0101
Station No : 1
Type : AFF50D
Revision : R3.05. 00
Generation :
10/28/2004 13 : 29
CPU Idle Time : 34Sec
Comm Load Ave : 0%
Cur : 0%
Test Mode : OFF
Control Status : RUN
Comm I/O : ON
TEMP
Air in
Air out
Battery ( L, R )
Battery ( L, R )
A070206E.EPS
.SF FCS0101 FCS Status Display
READY
MAN
CPU
CPU
PSU
PSU
Not ReadyStand-ByControlHard ReadyMaintenance
MYPJT Domain : 01 V net1 V net2
FCS
IOMFCS
COM
02
1
COM
PSU PSU
01
PSU PSU
COM
03COM
PSU PSU
COM
04COM
PSU PSU
2
Figure FFCS Status Display Window : FFCS £
SEE ALSO
For more information about FFCS status display window, see the following:
E7.8, “FFCS Status Display Window” in Part E “Human Interface Station” of Reference (IM 33S01B30-01E)
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-11
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-01
A7.2.5 Inspection by FFCS Status Display LEDsThis section explains how to inspect each modules and common sections of FFCS.
■ Inspection of LEDs : FFCS £Power supply modules, processor modules, bus interface modules, and I/O modules havestatus display LEDs. It can easily be identified whether or not a module is operating nor-mally by checking whether these LEDs are turned on or off.
Table Types and Functions of Status Display LEDs of Common Modules : FFCS £
Modules name Indicator Meaning of ON Meaning of OFF
Power supply module
SYS +5V output normal +5V output abnormal
FLD +24V output normal
ER Bus interface master module
STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal
SND-1 Sending data Data is not sent
RCV-1 Receiving data Data is not received
A070207E.EPS
ACT
DX
Module is operating normally
Module is set to dual-redundant operation Module is set to single operation
The module is stand-by
+24V output abnormal
STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal
RCV Receiving data Data is not received
SND Sending data Data is not sent
ER Bus interface slave module
STATUS Hardware normal Hardware abnormal
SEL During data transmission to I/O module Not sending
RSP During data reception from I/O module Not receiving
ESB businterface module
Processormodule
HRDY Hardware normal
RDY Module normal Module abnormal
CTRL Module is operating normally The module is stand-by
COPY Copying normal Not copying
SND-1, 2
RCV-1, 2
Sending frames to V net
Receiving frames from V net
Not sending
Not receiving
ESB Bus coupler module
RCV Receiving ESB bus frames from node units Not receiving
SND Sending ESB bus frames to V net Not sending
Hardware abnormal
A7-12<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.3 Replacing PFCS/SFCS PartsThis section describes replacement of PFCS/SFCS parts.
IMPORTANT
• When replacing a unit or part, or when connecting and disconnecting cables, of an on-line dual-redundant PFCS/SFCS, perform replacement work at each side.
• When tightening the power supply and processor cards mounting screws, use a fine-tipped screwdriver. The standard screw tightening torque is 0.25N • m.
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-13
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.3.1 Power Supply Unit Replacement ProcedureThis section describes replacement of power supply unit.
■ Off-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS
● Removal : PFCS/SFCS
1. Check that the power switch of the power supply unit to be removed is turned off.
2. Disconnect the power cable connector from the nest power distribution board.
3. Loosen the four screws fastening the unit to the nest. The screws do not have to be removed.
4. Grasp the handle at the center of the unit and pull the unit forward.
● Installation : PFCS/SFCS
1. Slide the replacement or inspected power supply unit along the nest guide rails until itseats firmly into the backboard connector.
2. Install the unit to the nest using the screws at the front of the unit.
3. Connect the power supply unit cable connector to the nest power distribution boardand set the unit power switch to ON.
4. Check if the RDY lamp on the front of the power supply unit lights and if the status inthe FCS status display window is normal.
A070301E.EPSPower cable connector
Power supply unit
Backboard
Connector
Guide rail
Nest power distribution boardConnector
Mounting screws
Mounting screws
Handle
Switch
Figure Removing and Installing Power Supply Unit : PFCS/SFCS
SEE ALSO
The display contents of FCS status display window differs according to model. For details, see thefollowing:
E7, “Windows for System Administration” in Part E “Human Interface Station” of Reference (IM33S01B30-01E)
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
A7-14<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ On-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS
● Single FCS : PFCS/SFCS
The power supply unit cannot be replaced on-line.
● Dual-redundant FCS : PFCS/SFCS
WARNING
When removing a power supply unit of an on-line dual-redundant FCS, disconnect thepower supply unit cable connector from the power distribution board so that the operatingside power supply unit and other units are not adversely affected and to avoid the danger ofelectric shock.
The power supply unit can be replaced without turning off the PFCS/SFCS power onlywhen the FCS has a dual-redundant construction.
• Removal
1. Set the power supply unit power switch to OFF, and disconnect the power supply cableconnector.
2. Check if the power supply unit status lamp (RDY) is off.
3. Loosen the power supply unit mounting screws.
4. Grip the handle at the front of the power supply unit and remove the unit by pulling itforward.
• Installation
1. Slide the power supply unit along the nest guide rails until the connector on the rear ofthe unit is seated firmly in the backboard connector.
2. Tighten the power supply unit mounting screws.Connect the power supply unit power cable to the connector and set the unit powerswitch to ON.
3. Check that the RDY lamp in front of the power supply unit lights and the FCS is normalon the FCS status display window.
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-15
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.3.2 Processor Card Replacement ProcedureThis section describes replacement of processor card.
■ Off-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS
WARNING
When the processor card is removed, the saved contents are erased. Before removing theunit, save the tuning parameters.
● Removal: PFCS/SFCS
1. Loosen the screws fastening the unit to the nest. The screws do not have to be re-moved.
2. Grip the handles at the top and bottom of the processor card and pull the unit forward.
● Installation: PFCS/SFCS
1. Check if the domain number and station number of the new processor card match thesettings of the removed processor card.
2. Slide the inspected processor card along the nest guide rails until it seats firmly intothe backboard connector.
3. Fasten the processor card to the nest using the screws at the front of the unit.
4. Turn on the power and check if the processor card is in the normal state by checking ifthe lamp on the front of the processor card is lit.
SEE ALSO
For a detailed description of lighting of the processor card front panel lamp, see the following:
A6.1.4, “Processor Card of PFCS/SFCS”
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A7-16<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A070302E.EPS
Processor unit
Backboard
Connectors
Guide rails
Mounting screw
Handle
CTRL lamp
START/STOPswitch
Figure Removing and Installing Processor Card : PFCS/SFCS
■ On-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS
● Single FCS : PFCS/SFCS
The processor card cannot be replaced on-line.
● Dual-redundant FCS : PFCS/SFCS
The processor card can be replaced without turning off the PFCS/SFCS power only whenthe PFCS/SFCS has a dual-redundant construction.
• Removal
1. Check if the CTRL lamp in the processor card to be removed is OFF (in the standbystate). If the CTRL lamp is ON, press the START/STOP switch to turn off the lamp (toplace it in the standby state).
2. Loosen the processor card mounting screws.
3. Grip the handle at the front of the processor card and remove the unit by pulling it forward.
• Installation
1. Check if the domain number and station number of the new processor card match thesettings of the removed unit.
2. Slide the processor card along the nest guide rails until the connectors on the rear ofthe unit seat firmly into the backboard connectors.
3. Tighten the processor card mounting screws.Push the START/STOP switch to restart.
4. After the power comes on, check if the processor card is in the normal state using thelamp on the unit and the FCS status display window.The processor card automatically starts copying the program.When copying is complete, the processor card enters the READY state.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-17
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.3.3 Control Bus Coupler Unit Replacement ProcedureThis section describes replacement of control bus coupler unit.
Replace the control bus coupler unit as described below.
■ Off-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCSThe control bus coupler unit is replaced when power is turned off.
When communication bus cables are redundant and another station connected to each busis operating, do not remove both bus cables from the connector assembly at the same time.
■ On-line Replacement : PFCS/SFCS
● Single Communication Bus : PFCS/SFCS
The control bus coupler unit cannot be replaced on-line.
● Dual-redundant Communication Bus : PFCS/SFCS
• Removal
1. Check if the coupler that is not to be replaced is in the normal state, and its ENBL/DSBL switch is in the ENBL position.
2. Set the ENBL/DSBL switch of the coupler to be replaced to the DSBL position.
3. Disconnect the connector assembly, with bus cable attached.
4. Loosen the two screws fastening the control bus coupler unit to the nest.
5. Grip the handles at the front top and bottom of the control bus coupler unit and removethe unit by pulling it forward.
SEE ALSO
For a detailed description of the bus cable connection and disconnection procedure, see the following:
A4.3.1, “Connecting the PFCS/SFCS Bus Cable”
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A7-18<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
• Installation
1. Set the ENBL/DSBL switch of the new coupler unit to the DSBL position.
2. Install the connector assembly, with bus cable attached, to the control bus couplerunit.
3. Slide the control bus coupler unit along the nest guide rails until the connector on therear of the unit seats firmly into the backboard connector.
4. Set the ENBL/DSBL switch of the installed coupler unit to the ENBL position.
5. Check if the control bus coupler unit is in the normal state using the lamp on the frontof the panel and the FCS status display window.
A070303E.EPS
Control bus coupler unitthat is not replaced
Backboard
ConnectorGuide rail
ConnectorControl bus coupler unit
to be replaced
Mounting screw
Handle
Connectorassembly
Control bus bus cable
ENBL/DSBLswitch
ENBL/DSBLswitch
Figure Installing and Removing Control Bus Coupler Unit and Connector Assembly : PFCS/SFCS
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-19
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.3.4 Battery Unit Replacement ProcedureThis section describes replacement of battery unit and battery pack placed in thebattery backup unit.
■ Battery Life Label : PFCS/SFCSThe battery unit installed at the BACKUP-L side and the battery unit installed at theBACKUP-R side have a 1-to-1 correspondence with the processor card at the left side andthe processor card at the right side, respectively.
The battery unit contains the processor card main memory backup battery pack. A batterylife label is stuck to the front of the battery unit.
The life the battery pack varies with average ambient temperature. Replace the batterypack according to Table in the section A7.3.5, “PFCS/SFCS Periodic Replacement Parts.”
WARNING
When the memory contents must be preserved, always replace the battery pack with thePFCS/SFCS power turned on. If the FCS power is turned off, the contents of the processorcard main memory corresponding to the battery unit will be lost.
The figure below shows the battery unit with the battery pack installed.
A070304E.EPS
Date of a battery life
Battery packBattery unit
Figure Battery Unit and Battery Pack : PFCS/SFCS
SEE ALSO
For the recommended replacement interval, see the following:
A7.3.5, “Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts Having Defined Life Spans)”
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
A7-20<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Replacing Battery Unit : PFCS/SFCS
CAUTION
• When handling battery pack, wear wrist strap for static prevention.
• When changing batteries while the power supply is not shutdown, do not put handsinside of the device since it is danger of electric shock.
• The used batteries need to be handled carefully. You can also handover the usedbatteries to the Yokogawa's sales agents.
Mounting and changing batteries must follow the procedure in this document.
● Removal : PFCS/SFCS
1. Set the CPU BACKUP ON/OFF switch of the battery backup unit to OFF.The CPU BACKUP ON/OFF switch is the lock type. Switch it while pulling the knobforward.
2. Loosen the battery unit mounting screws, and pull the battery unit toward you byholding the handle.When the unit is pulled out about 10 mm, the connector inside the battery backup unitis disconnected from the battery pack connector.
3. Separate the battery backup unit from the battery unit by pulling the battery unitforward. (Depth: Approximately 70 mm)
4. Remove the battery clamp bracket at the top of the battery unit. (Two M3 screws)
5. Squeeze the tabs at the left and right sides of the connector to the inside and removethem from the square holes. The tabs can be easily removed by lightly squeezingthem to the inside with pliers and pushing them forward. (See the figure below)
A070305E.EPS
Inside connector
Handle
Battery unit
Battery packclamp bracket
Battery pack connector
Battery backup unit
CPU BACKUPON/OFF switch
Battery unit mounting screw
Tab
Tab
M3 screws
Figure Battery Unit and Connectors : PFCS/SFCS
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-21
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Installation : PFCS/SFCS
1. Stick a new Battery Life label to the new battery pack, and then install the battery packinto the battery unit while keeping the correct direction of the battery pack connector.
2. When installing the battery pack into the battery unit, set the connector to the corner ofthe bracket while keeping the larger side of the connector cover upward, the black linerightward and the red line leftward (as illustrated below).
3. After installing the new battery pack to the battery unit, set the CPU BACKUP ON/OFFswitch to the ON position.
A070306E.EPS
Red line at the left
Black line at the right
Large part at the top Square hole M3 mounting screws
Battery clamp bracket
Connector
Battery pack
Stick new batterylife label
Figure Installing battery pack : PFCS/SFCS
IMPORTANT
• Replace the battery pack before the end of its life.
• Order a replacement battery pack at least one month before the end of the old batterypack’s life.
• Do not short circuit the battery terminals.
• Do not throw a used battery pack into a fire or heat it. It will cause electrolyte leakage,heating, and breaking.
• Do not disassemble and modify the battery pack.
• Do not use a battery pack other than this product.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-22<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.3.5 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts HavingDefined Life Spans)Model PFCS/SFCS has components with a useful life that need to be replaced peri-odically. The parts having defined life spans, which can be replaced by the user areavailable as spare parts and consumables. Purchase and replace as necessary.
Read this section thoroughly and carry out the periodical replacement.
IMPORTANT
Precautions for parts having defined life spans
• The term “Parts having defined life spans” refers to parts that are expected to wear outor break down within 10 years from initial use under normal conditions of use and stor-age. Therefore, parts with expected life spans of 10 years or more are excluded here.
• The recommended replacement cycle is the cycle indicated for preventive mainte-nance. It provides no guarantee against the accidental failures.
• The recommended replacement cycle is merely a guideline. The actual replacementcycle depends on the usage conditions.
• The recommended replacement cycle is subject to change according to actual fieldresults.
■ Parts Having Defined Life Spans : PFCS/SFCSThe table below shows the recommended part replacement cycles for preventive maintenance.Parts indicated by a “Yes” in the “Replacement by user” column of the table can be replaced bythe user. Parts indicated by a “No” in the “Replacement by user” column cannot be re-placed by the user, so please contact the Yokogawa’s sales agents for replacement.
Table Periodic Replacement Parts Having Defined Life Spans : PFCS/SFCS
Part name Part number
Recommended replacement cycle
Replacementby user Remarks
Battery pack S9765UK
3 years Yes At the ambient temperature 30 deg. C or less (*1)
Power supply unit(24 V DC) PW704
(PW701)
8 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
Power supply unit(220 - 240 V AC) PW702 8 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
Power supply unit(100 - 120 V AC) PW701 8 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
1.5 years Yes At the ambient temperature 40 deg. C or less (*1)
9 months Yes At the ambient temperature 50 deg. C or less (*1)
8 years No 100 - 120 V AC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
(PW702) 8 years No 220 - 240 V AC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
(PW704) 8 years No 24 V DC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor (in a power supply unit)
Power supplyinternal fuse
S9578VK 3 years No (for PW701, 6.3A)
S9578VK 3 years No (for PW702, 6.3A)
S9504VK 3 years No (for PW704, 15A)
A070307E.EPS
*1: The ambient temperature varies with FCS installation conditions. When FCS is installed in the cabinet, theambient temperature means the temperature inside the cabinet, not outside the cabinet.
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-01
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-23
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.4 Replacing LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS PartsThis section describes the procedures for replacing cards and units in a non-redun-dant LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS and redundant LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-24<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.4.1 Common Procedure for Replacing Cards and UnitsThis section describes the common procedure for removing and installing a unit orcard.
■ Removing a Unit or Card : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £To remove a unit or card from nest:
1. Loosen the screws that attach the unit or card (two or four, black, M2.5 screws). Thescrews need not be removed.
2. Grip the handles at the top and bottom on card or unit, or the handle at the top, andpull to remove the card or unit.
■ Installing a Unit or Card : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
IMPORTANT
Use a fine-tipped screwdriver when installing a card or unit in a nest. The standard tighten-ing torque is 0.25 N • m.
1. Insert the card or unit which has been inspected or a new one to the bottom along withthe guide rail of the nest until it is firmly inserted into the connector on the back board.
2. Tighten the attaching screws (M2.5, black) at the front to fix the card or unit to the nest.
3. Make sure that the indication lamps of each card and unit indicate normal state.
SEE ALSO
After installing a card or unit, check the indication lamp(s) and confirm that the card or unit is normal inreference to the following:
A7.2.3, “Check of Status Indication Lamps : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS”
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-25
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.4.2 Replacing Cards or Units in Non-Redundant LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCSWhen replacing a card or unit in a non-redundant LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, followthe precautions and procedures described below.
■ Replacing the Power Supply Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
CAUTION
Disconnect the connector at the nest power distribution board before removing the powersupply unit.
● Replacement During Power-off : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
WARNING
• Removing the power supply unit clears the memory contents of the processor card.Save the memory contents before removing the power supply unit if necessary.
• To remove:
1. Disconnect the power cable connector of the power supply unit to be removed fromthe nest power distribution board.
2. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the power supply unit.
3. To avoid draining the battery, turn OFF the battery switch of the removed unit.
• To install:
1. Install the unit according to Section A7.4.1.
2. Connect the power cable connector of the power supply unit to the nest power distri-bution board.
3. Turn ON the battery switch.
SEE ALSO
For more information about installing and removing the power supply unit, see the following:
A7.4.1" Common Procedure for replacing cards and Units"
● Replacement During Operation : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
The power supply unit cannot be removed during operation.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-26<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Replacing the Processor Card and RIO/ESB Bus Interface Card : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
● Replacement During Power-off : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
WARNING
Removing the processor card will clears the memory contents of the processor card. Savethe memory contents before removing the processor card.
• To remove:
1. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard from nest.
• To install:
1. Confirm that the domain and station number settings on the processor card to beinstalled, are the same as those of the removed card.
2. Follow Section A7.4.1 to install the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard to nest.
3. Then check the status lamps on the card to confirm that the card operates normally.
SEE ALSO
For more information about installing and removing the processor cards, RIO/ESB bus interfaces cards,see the following:
A7.4.1 "Common Procedure for replacing cards and Units"
● Replacement During Operation : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Neither the processor card nor an RIO bus/ESB bus interface card can be removed duringoperation.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-27
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.4.3 Replacing Cards or Units in Duplexed LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCSFor a duplexed LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS, cards and units can be replaced duringoperation; however, follow the precautions and procedures described below.
■ Replacing a Power Supply Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
● Replacement During Power-off : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
WARNING
• Removing a power supply unit clears the memory contents of the processor card onthe same side. Save the memory contents before removing a power supply unit. If thesame memory contents are saved in the paired processor card, however, saving is notnecessary since the memory contents will be copied automatically when the power isturned on again.
• To remove:
1. Disconnect the power cable connector of the power supply unit to be removed fromthe nest power distribution board.
2. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the power supply unit.
3. To avoid draining the battery, turn OFF the battery switch of the removed unit.
• To install:
1. Install the unit according to Section A7.4.1.
2. Connect the power cable connector of the power supply unit to the nest power distri-bution board.
3. Turn ON the battery switch when power is supplied to the power supply unit.
SEE ALSO
For more information about installing and removing the power supply unit, see the following:
A7.4.1 "Common Procedure for replacing cards and Units"
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-28<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Replacement During Operation : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
CAUTION
• Before removing a power supply unit from a duplexed LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCSduring operation, disconnect the cable connector of the power supply unit from thenest power distribution board in order to prevent influencing the other power supplyunit in service and other cards and units, and to prevent electric shock.
• To remove:
1. Check the status lamps of the power supply unit, processor card, and RIO bus/ESBbus interface card on the side other than the power supply unit to be removed, andconfirm that they are normal.
2. Go to step 3 when removing the power supply unit on the side where the processorcard is in the stand-by mode.To remove the power supply unit on the side where the processor card is in service,press the START/STOP switch on the processor card in service to change the modesof the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card in service to stand-by.At this time, confirm that the modes of the processor card and RIO bus/ESB businterface card on the other side are changed to in service.
3. Disconnect the cable connector of the power supply unit to be removed, from the nestpower distribution board.
4. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the power supply unit.
5. To avoid draining the battery, turn OFF the battery switch of the removed unit.
• To install:
1. Install the power supply unit according to Section A7.4.1.
2. Connect the cable connector of the power supply unit to the nest power distributionboard.
3. Turn ON the battery switch of the power supply unit.
SEE ALSO
For more information about installing and removing the power supply unit, see the following:
A7.4.1 "Common Procedure for replacing cards and Units"
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-29
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Replacing a Processor Card and RIO Bus/ESB Bus Interface Card :LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
● Replacement During Power-off : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
WARNING
Removing a processor card clears the memory contents of the processor card. Save thememory contents before removing a processor card. If the same memory contents aresaved in the paired processor card, however, saving is not needed since the memorycontents are copied automatically when the power is turned on again.
• To remove:
1. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard.
• To install:
1. Confirm that the domain and station number settings on the processor card to beinstalled, are the same as those of the removed card.
2. Install the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card, and then check thestatus lamps on the card to confirm that the card operates normally. For a processorcard, the COPY lamp lights to indicate that the program is being copied.
● Replacement During Operation : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• To remove:
1. Check the status lamps of the power supply unit, processor card, and RIO bus/ESBbus interface card on the side other than the processor card or RIO bus/ESB businterface card to be removed, and confirm that they are normal.
2. Go to step 3 when removing the processor card or RIO bus/ESB bus interface card inthe stand-by mode.To remove the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card in service, pressthe START/STOP switch on the processor card in service to change the modes of theprocessor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card in service to stand-by.At this time, confirm that the modes of the processor card and RIO bus/ESB businterface card on the other side are changed to in service.
3. Follow Section A7.4.1 to remove the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard.
• To install:
1. Confirm that the domain and station number settings on the processor card to beinstalled, are the same as those of the removed card.
2. Install the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interface card.
3. Then check the status lamps on the processor card and RIO bus/ESB bus interfacecard operates normally. For a processor card, the COPY lamp lights to indicate thatthe program is being copied.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-30<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.4.4 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts HavingDefined Life Spans)Model LFCS2/LFC2, KFCS2/KFCS has components with a useful life that need to bereplaced periodically. The parts having defined life spans, which can be replaced bythe user are available as spare parts and consumables. Purchase and replace asnecessary.
Read this section thoroughly and carry out the periodical replacement.
IMPORTANT
Precautions for parts having defined life spans
• The term “Parts having defined life spans” refers to parts that are expected to wear outor break down within 10 years from initial use under normal conditions of use andstorage. Therefore, parts with expected life spans of 10 years or more are excludedhere.
• The recommended replacement cycle is the cycle indicated for preventive mainte-nance. It provides no guarantee against the accidental failures.
• The recommended replacement cycle is merely a guideline. The actual replacementcycle depends on the usage conditions.
• The recommended replacement cycle is subject to change according to actual fieldresults.
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-31
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Parts Having Defined Life Spans : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £The table below shows the recommended part replacement cycles for preventive mainte-nance. Parts indicated by a “Yes” in the “Replacement by user” column of the table can bereplaced by the user. Parts indicated by a “No” in the “Replacement by user” columncannot be replaced by the user, so please contact the Yokogawa’s sales agents for re-placement.
Table Periodic Replacement Parts Having Defined Life Spans : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Part NamePart
numberRecommended
replacement cycleReplacement
by user Remarks
Air filter
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor (in a power supply unit)
T9070CB 1 year Yes For door fan unit (Cabinet type)
(PW301) 8 years No
100 - 120 V AC. For AF�10/AF�30 : At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)For AF�20/AF�40 : At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower (*1)
(PW302) 8 years No
220 - 240 V AC. For AF�10/AF�30 : At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)For AF�20/AF�40 : At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower (*1)
(PW304) 8 years No
24 V DC.For AF�10/AF�30 : At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)For AF�20/AF�40 : At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower (*1)
Fan unit Model AIP601 4 years Yes For nest and door fan units
Battery pack S9400UK
Fuse built in power supply unit
S9502VKS9580VKS9504VK
S9109VK
A1546EF
3 years
3 years Yes
For PW301For PW302For PW304
For PW484
For PW481, PW482
At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower (*1)
1.5 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
9 months Yes At the ambient temperature of 50 deg. C or lower (*1)
A070401E.EPS
T9070CK 1 year Yes For FCU nest (Rack mountable type)
8 years
No
No
8 years No
*1: The ambient temperature varies with FCS installation conditions. When FCS is installed in the cabinet, the ambienttemperature means the temperature inside the cabinet, not outside the cabinet.
How to replace the air filters, fan units, fuses, battery packs and relays will be explained inthe following sections.
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
A7-32<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Replacing an Air Filter : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
CAUTION
Periodically clean air filters at about three-month intervals. Use water or neutral detergentand re-fit the filters after they have dried.
● Replacing the Air Filter of Rack Mountable : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS£
The air filter is housed in a bracket and held by two nylon latches beneath the nest fans asshown below, and can be replaced during operation.
Complete the replacement as quickly as possible.
A070402E.EPS
Filter
Bracket
Nylon latches
Figure Replacing an Air Filter : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• To replace:
1. Pull the nylon latches to unlock them and draw off the bracket.
2. Remove the air filter from the bracket. If the bracket is dirty, use a dry cloth or vacuumcleaner to remove stains and dust.
3. Put a clean air filter in the bracket and insert the bracket to the bottom. It is recom-mended to use the air filter that was installed when delivered and the one that cameas an accessory, in turns.
4. Push to lock the nylon latches.
5. Clean the dirty air filter using neutral detergent and store it after it has dried.
This completes the replacement.
As a guideline, clean air filters every three months.
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-33
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Replacing the Air Filters with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
There are two fans on each of the front and rear door of the cabinet to cool the inside of thecabinet.
An air filter is installed at the air intake of each door as shown below.
A070403E.EPS
Handle
Air filter
Door fans
Bracket
Figure Air Filter for Door Fans : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• To replace:
1. Open the front or rear door.
2. The air filter can be found inside of the door between the door plate and the door fans.Grip the bracket handle with the thumb and index finger and pull the handle up. Then,take off the air filter from the bracket. If the bracket is dirty, use a dry cloth or vacuumcleaner to remove stains and dust.
3. Put a clean air filter in the bracket and push the bracket back to the bottom. It isrecommended to use the air filter that was installed when delivered and the one thatcame as an accessory, in turns.
4. Clean the dirty air filter using neutral detergent and store it after it has dried.
This completes the replacement.
As a guideline, clean air filters every three months.
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
A7-34<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Replacing a Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
WARNING
When online replacing the fan unit (AIP601) while the FCS is running, check if the seal withcharacter “1” enclosed in a rectangular is stuck at the fan unit.
If the seal is not stuck on the fan unit, replacing the fan unit should not be performed online.If the seal is not stuck on the fan unit and replacing the fan unit is performed online, theFCS may unexpectedly stop.
A070414E.EPS
1
seal1
Figure Seal Stuck on Fan Unit (AIP601)
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-35
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Replacing a Nest Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
The two nest fan units are beneath the LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet as shownin the figure below.
WARNING
When a fan fails, or when the speed of a fan becomes abnormal, the corresponding “FANALARM” lamp on the external interface unit lights in red. (On the left is the N1 fan, and onthe right is N2.) A fan unit can be replaced while the FCU is operating. However, do notreplace both fan units at the same time; replace them one by one.The above actions should be performed carefully so as to prevent the fan unit from strikes.
Air direction
Fan unitA070404E.EPS
1
Handle
Movable plate
Guide pin
Guide External interface unit
Figure Replacing a Nest Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• To replace:
The fan unit should be replaced according to the procedure below.
1. Replace the entire set of a nest fan unit at one time: fans, 12 V DC power supplyconnector, and fan attaching bracket.
2. Grip the handle with the thumb and index finger and move the movable plate to unlockthe unit.
3. Then, pull to draw out the fan unit.
4. Fit the guide of the new fan unit to the nest rail of the nest and insert the fan unit to thebottom until it engages with the connector of the nest.The above actions should be performed carefully so as to prevent the fan unit fromstrikes.
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
A7-36<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Replacing a Door Fan Unit (with Cabinet) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Two door fan units are installed on each of the front and rear doors of the cabinet as shownin the figure below.
WARNING
When a fan fails, or when the speed of a fan becomes abnormal, the corresponding “FANALARM” lamp on the main power distribution board lights in red. A fan unit can be replacedwhile the node is operating. However, do not replace both fan units on the door at thesame time; replace them one by one.The above actions should be performed carefully so as to prevent the fan unit from strikes.
A070405E.EPS
Door fan unitsuctioning the air from outside the cabinetHKU
Figure Replacing a Door Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• To replace:
The fan unit should be replaced according to the procedure below.
1. Replace the entire set of a nest fan unit at one time: fans, 12 V DC power supplyconnector, and fan attaching bracket.
2. Grip the handle with the thumb and index finger and move the movable plate to unlockthe unit.
3. Then, pull to draw out the fan unit.
4. Fit the guide of the new fan unit to the nest rail and insert the fan unit to the bottomuntil it is engaged with the connector.The above actions should be performed carefully so as to prevent the fan unit fromstrikes.
When the speed of a fan becomes abnormal, the corresponding FAN ALARM lamp (LED)on the external interface unit lights in red. The LED labels correspond to fan units individu-ally as follows: D1 for the left fan on the front door, D2 for the right fan on the front door, D3for the left fan on the rear door, and D4 for the right fan on the rear door.
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-37
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Replacing Fuses : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £Although fuses are not mandatory-replacement parts, the following describes the replace-ment procedure.
WARNING
When online replacing the fuses of the fan unit while the FCS is running, check if the sealwith character “1” enclosed in a rectangular is stuck at the fan unit.
If the seal is not stuck on the fan unit, replacing the fuses of the fan unit should not beperformed online. If the seal is not stuck on the fan unit and replacing the fuses of the fanunit is performed online, the FCS may unexpectedly stop.
A070414E.EPS
1
seal1
Figure Seal Stuck on Fan Unit (AIP601)
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-38<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Replacing a Fan Fuse : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
A fuse for each fan is mounted on the external interface unit.
The figure below shows fuses on the external interface units of an LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with cabinet and rack mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS.
FUSE
RL1RDYRLYRL2 N1 N2 D1 D2 D3 D4
FAN ALARM
FCU FRONTDOOR
REARDOOR
CN3
(Part No. S9528VK: 1.6 A fuse)A070409E.EPS
Figure Fuses on External Interface Unit of LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
FAN ALARM
FUSE
RL1 RL2
READY
TM1
N1 N2
A070410E.EPS
(Part No. S9528VK: 1.6 A fuse)
Figure Fuses on External Interface Unit of Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
• To replace:
The fuse can be hot-replaced while the FCS is running. Before replacing the fuse while theFCS is running, check if a seal with 1 enloased in a rectangular is stuck at the fan unit.
1. Pull out the fuse. It may be too tight to pull out by hand; it is easier to use a pair oflong-nose pliers to clip the fuse and pull it out.
2. Confirm that the new fuse has the same rating and install it. Make sure that the letterson the fuse case are not upside down.
3. Confirm that the corresponding fan runs normally.
● Replacing a Relay Fuse : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
Relays for the CPU ready signal from the processor card and speed control of fans aremounted on the external interface unit.
The procedure for replacing these fuses is the same as that for a fan fuse described above.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-39
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Replacing the Battery Pack : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £A battery pack is built into the power supply unit in order to back up the main memory of theprocessor card in case of a power failure.
CAUTION
• Use only a battery specified by Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
• Wear a wrist strap when handling a battery pack.
• When replacing the battery unit while the power is on, do not touch the internal circuitsof the power supply unit since there are high-voltage circuits.
• If the memory contents must not be cleared when replacing the battery unit, makesure you leave the power to the FCU turned on. Turning OFF the battery switch whenthe power is off results in the loss of all the memory contents in the processor card.
The label on the faceplate of a battery unit shows the validity period, which is based on thecondition where the ambient temperature is 30 deg C or less on average.
Replace the battery with a new one when the validity period expires.
The figure below shows how a battery unit is installed.
BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)
07.10,
Battery unit attaching screw
Battery ON/OFF switch
Data of battery life
Battery Life Label
Connector
A070411E.EPS
Battery pack
Bracket
Bracket attachingscrews
Figure Power Supply Unit and Battery Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-40<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A070412E.EPS
Connector
Battery pack
Unused pin
ConnectorClaw
When plugging in the connector, make sure that the red wire is lower and the black is upper.
Battery pack
Orientation of connector
Black wire
Red wire
Top
Claw
Figure Battery Pack and Connector : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
● To replace : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
The battery pack should be replaced according to the procedure below.
1. Confirm that the power to the FCU is on.
2. Turn OFF the BATTERY toggle switch, which is a locking switch and needs to beunlocked by pulling the lever first.
3. Loosen the battery unit attaching screw and pull the handle towards you.When the battery is pulled out by about 10 mm, it is disconnected from the connectorinside the power supply unit.
4. Continuously pull the battery unit to remove it from the power supply unit. (The batteryunit is 150 mm depth.)
5. Detach the bracket for fastening the battery unit at the rear of the battery unit byunscrewing the two M3 screws.
6. Push the top and bottom claws of the connector to the inside and pull out the connec-tor from the socket. The connector can be easily pulled out by using a pair of long-nose pliers to claw the connector softly and push it slightly.
7. Install a new battery in the reverse order. For the orientation of the connector, see thefigure.
8. After installing a new battery unit in the power supply unit, turn ON the BATTERYtoggle switch.
This completes replacement of the battery unit.
IMPORTANT
• Replace a battery pack when the validity period expires.
• Order a new battery at least one month before the validity period expires.
• Wear a wrist strap when handling a battery pack.
• Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.
• Do not throw a battery pack in a fire.
• Do not disassemble a battery pack.
• A battery pack contains nickel-cadmium batteries, and hence it must be discardedvery carefully to prevent environmental pollution.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-41
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Replacing a Relay (with Cabinet) : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
CAUTION
Do not detach the relay when the READY contact is used and a voltage is applied to theREADY terminals; an electric shock may result.
If the relay absolutely must be detached while the READY contact is excited, contactYokogawa’s sales agents.
A plug-in relay is installed at the contact output unit on the main power distribution unit of anFCU with cabinet.
Locked Unlocked
Contact Output Unit(Part number of relay: S9725VM)
A070413E.EPS
StopperLever
Relay
SocketClutch
Figure Replacing a Relay : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
● To replace : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS £
The relay should be replaced according to the procedure below.
1. When the relay is correctly installed, the clutch on the lever attached to the socket islocking the stopper of the relay cover to prevent the relay from coming off. (See theleft figure above.)
2. Turn the lever to the right gently.The tip of the level will move apart from the relay case by nearly 5 mm, and the rightside bottom of the relay will be lifted up by the lever action.
3. Pull out the relay cover from the socket by hand.
4. To install a new relay, plug it into the socket perpendicular to the socket when the leveris in the unlocking position (turned right) until the clutch on the level makes a clicksound and the relay is locked.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
A7-42<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.5 Replacing FFCS PartsThis section describes the procedures for replacing modules and units in a FFCS.
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-43
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A7.5.1 Replacing Common ModulesThis section explains how to remove/install power supply modules, processormodules and bus interface modules. Dual-redundant power supply modules, proces-sor modules and bus interface modules can be removed or installed without turningoff the power supply of a field control unit.
IMPORTANT
If ESB buses or ER buses are in dual-redundant configuration, the power supply modulesand bus interface modules are provided for both segments. When replacing the modules,remove the modules of one segment and install a new on first. Only when the segment iscorrectly running, then to remove and install the modules of the other segment.
■ Exchange Bus Cables : FFCS £Check the hardware status on FFCS status display window.
● Procedure of Exchanging ESB Bus Cables : FFCS £
1. When exchanging a bus cable, the corresponding bus becomes abnormal. It is neces-sary to confirm that the communication to all the nodes and I/O modules by the otherbus is properly performed.
2. Disconnect the ESB bus cable from the ESB bus coupler module.
3. Exchange the ESB bus cables.
4. Connect the ESB bus cable to the ESB bus coupler module.
5. Confirm that all the related parts are running properly.
● Procedure of Exchanging ER Bus Cables : FFCS £
1. Check on FFCS status display window or the LED on EB401 module to confirm thatthe ER bus to be exchanged is on the standby side. (When EB401 is standby, ACT isunlit.)
If the EB401 is in control, it is necessary to switch the control right to the other EB401.
2. Exchange the ER bus cable.
3. Then confirm that all the nodes on the bus are running properly.
A7-44<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
■ Relpacing Power Supply Module : FFCS £Power supply modules can be replaced according to the procedure described below.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to check that the status display LED of the power supply module to be removedis turned off before removing the power supply module.
Remove the connector of the power supply cables from the external interface unit and turnoff the power supply before removing the power supply module.
● Procedure for Removing Power Supply Modules : FFCS £
1. Shut off the power supply of the power supply module to be removed.In the case of dual-redundant modules, shut off the power supply of the power supplymodule on the side to be removed.
2. Remove the fixing screws of the power supply module. There is one at the upper partand two at the bottom part.
3. Pull the power supply module forward and remove it from the base unit.
● Procedure for Installing Power Supply Modules : FFCS £
IMPORTANT
Use a plus or minus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the power supply module. As aguideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
Install the power supply module following the steps of the “Procedure for Removing PowerSupply Modules” in the reverse order.
1. Install the power supply module on the base unit.
2. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and two places at the bottom part of thepower supply module.
3. Insert the corresponding connector of the power supply cable to the external interfaceunit and supply power.
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-45
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A070501E.EPS
Base unit
Power supply module
Figure Installing Power Supply Module : FFCS £
A7-46<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
■ Replacing Processor Module : FFCS £How to replace the processor module is explained in this chapter.
WARNING
When remove the processor module, the contents stored in the memory will be erased. It isnecessary to run saving parameters before pulling out the processor module.
SEE ALSO
For more information about front lamps of processor module, see the following:
A6.3.3, “Processor Module”
● Remove Processor Module : FFCS £
1. Confirm that the CTRL lamp on the processor module to be removed is off (indicatesthat the module is in standby state).
2. Disconnect the V net coupler cable at the front side of the processor module. Andpromptly remove the two V net coupler cables at both positions.
3. Loosen the screws that fix the processor module.
4. Pull out the processor module straightly.
● Install Processor Module : FFCS £
1. Check the processor module to be installed to confirm that the domain number andthe station number are the same as the replaced module.
2. Install the processor module into the base unit. Make sure that the processor moduleis firmly inserted into the slot at the backboard.
3. Fasten the screws that fix the processor module.
4. Connect the V net coupler cable at the front side of the processor module. Andpromptly put back the two V net coupler cables at both positions.
5. Check the front lamps or the FFCS status display window to make sure that theprocessor module is at normal state.
Then program copy will start automatically. When copy is completed, the module willbe in standby state.
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-47
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A070502E.EPS
Base unit
Processor module
Figure Installing Processor Module : FFCS £
A7-48<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
■ Replacing ESB Bus Coupler Module : FFCS £ESB bus coupler module for both single and dual-redundant operation are replacedaccording to the procedure described below.
● Procedure for Removing ESB Bus Coupler Module : FFCS £
1. Remove the fixing screws of the ESB bus coupler module. There is one at the upperpart and one at the bottom part.
2. Pull the ESB bus coupler module forward and remove it from the base unit.
3. Remove the upper and lower part screws of the cable connector thus to remove theESB bus coupler module.
● Procedure for Installing ESB Bus Coupler Module : FFCS £
IMPORTANT
Use a plus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the ESB bus coupler module. As a guide-line, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
Install the ESB bus coupler module following the steps of the “Procedure for RemovingESB Bus Coupler Module” in the reverse order.
1. Install the cable connector on the installed ESB bus coupler module.
2. Use the two screws at the upper and lower part of the connector to fasten the cableconnector. The torque to fasten the screws on ESB bus connector is about 0.3 N•m.
3. Install the ESB bus coupler module from the base unit.
4. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and one place at the bottom part of the ESBbus coupler module.
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-49
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
■ Replacing ESB Bus Interface Module : FFCS £ESB bus interface module for both single and dual-redundant operation are replacedaccording to the procedure described below.
● Procedure for Removing ESB Bus Interface Module : FFCS £
1. Remove the fixing screws of the ESB bus interface module. There is one at the upperpart and one at the bottom part.
2. Pull the ESB bus interface module forward and remove it from the base unit.
3. Remove the upper and lower part screws of the branch connector thus to remove theESB bus interface module.
4. Remove the ESB bus branch connector. But do not disconnect the ESB bus cableconnected to the branch connector.
● Procedure for Installing ESB Bus Interface Module : FFCS £
IMPORTANT
Use a plus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the ESB bus interface module. As a guide-line, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
Install the ESB bus interface module following the steps of the “Procedure for RemovingESB Bus Interface Module” in the reverse order.
1. Set the ESB address of the ESB bus interface module to be installed to the sameaddress as the removed ESB bus interface module.
2. Install the branch connector on the installed ESB bus interface module.
3. Fix the upper and lower part screws on the installed ESB bus branch connector.
4. Pinch the upper and lower parts of the ESB bus interface module with your fingers andinstall it on the base unit.
5. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and one place at the bottom part of the ESBbus interface module.
A7-50<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
■ Replacing ER Bus Interface Master Module : FFCS £ER bus Interface Master Module for both single and dual-redundant operation arereplaced according to the procedure described below.
● Procedure for Removing ER Bus Interface Master Module : FFCS £
1. Remove the communication cable of the ER bus Interface Master Module to beremoved.
Remove the insulation sheet and disconnect the T-type connector from the BNCconnector of the ER bus Interface Master Module. At this point, do not remove thecables and terminal resistor connected to the T-type connector.
2. Remove the fixing screws of the ER bus Interface Master Module. There is one at theupper part and one at the bottom part.
3. Pull the ER bus Interface Master Module forward and remove it from the base unit.
● Procedure for Installing ER Bus Interface Master Module : FFCS £
IMPORTANT
Use a plus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the ER bus Interface Master Module. As aguideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
Install the ER bus Interface Master Module following the steps of the “Procedure for Re-moving ER Bus Interface Master Module” in the reverse order.
1. Pinch the upper and lower parts of the ER bus Interface Master Module with yourfingers and install it on the base unit.
2. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and one place at the bottom part of the ERbus Interface Master Module.
3. Install the communication cable on the installed ER bus Interface Master Module.
4. Installed the insulation sheet.
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-51
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
■ Replacing ER Bus Interface Slave Module : FFCS £ER bus Interface Slave Module for both single and dual-redundant operation arereplaced according to the procedure described below.
● Procedure for Removing ER Bus Interface Slave Module : FFCS £
1. Remove the communication cable of the ER bus Interface Slave Module to be re-moved.
Remove the insulation sheet and disconnect the T-type connector from the BNCconnector of the ER bus Interface Slave Module. At this point, do not remove thecables and terminal resistor connected to the T-type connector.
2. Remove the fixing screws of the ER bus Interface Slave Module. There is one at theupper part and one at the bottom part.
3. Pull the ER bus Interface Slave Module forward and remove it from the base unit.
● Procedure for Installing ER Bus Interface Slave Module : FFCS £
IMPORTANT
Use a plus driver to tighten the screws for fixing the ER bus Interface Slave Module. As aguideline, the screw tightening torque should be approximately 0.5 N•m.
Install the ER bus Interface Slave Module following the steps of the “Procedure for Remov-ing ER Bus Interface Slave Module” in the reverse order.
1. Set the address setting switch of the ER bus Interface Slave Module to be installed tothe same address as the removed ER bus Interface Slave Module.
The settings for ER bus Interface Slave Module are remembered only when the poweron the module. Thus, when the settings are changed while the module are installed inbase unit and with power supply on, the changed settings become valid after therestart the power supply once.
2. Pinch the upper and lower parts of the ER bus Interface Slave Module with yourfingers and install it on the base unit.
3. Fix screws in one place at the upper part and one place at the bottom part of the ERbus Interface Slave Module.
4. Install the communication cable on the installed ER bus Interface Slave Module.
5. Installed the insulation sheet.
A7-52<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
■ Replacing V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £
● Procedure for Removing V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £
1. Make sure the redundant coupler not to be replaced is working normally and thecommunication switch (ENBL/DSBL) is at ENBL position.
2. Turn the communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) of the coupler to be replaced to DSBLposition.
3. Disconnect the T-type branch connector and V net coupler cable together with the Vnet cable.
4. Loosen the two screws that fixing the coupler unit to utility unit.
5. Pull out the V net coupler straightly.
SEE ALSO
For more information about disconnecting V net cable, see the following:
A4.3.4, “Connecting Bus Cables to FFCS”
● Procedure for Installing V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £
1. Turn the communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) on the coupler to be installed to DSBLposition.
2. Put the T-type branch connector to the V net coupler unit with V net cable connected.
3. Connect the V net coupler cable to the V net coupler unit.
4. Insert the coupler unit into the deep end of the utility unit and make sure the unit isfirmly connected to the slot at the backboard.
5. Tighten the two screws so as to fix the V net coupler to the utility unit.
6. Turn the communication switch (ENBL/DSBL) on the coupler to ENBL position.
7. Check the front lamps of processor module or the FFCS status display window tomake sure that the V net coupler unit is at normal state.
A070503E.EPS
T-type Branch connector
V net coupler unit
Utility unit
Communication switch
V net cable
Screw
Screw
V net coupler cable
Figure Replacement of V net Coupler Unit : FFCS £
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-53
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A7.5.2 Exchange NodeDo the followings for exchanging a node
• Switch off the power supply of the node
• This can be done even the FFCS is running
If this performed while the FFCS is running (online), it is necessary to be very carefulto carry out the following procedures.
■ Procedure of Exchanging Local Node : FFCS £1. Check the status of the nodes on both sides, as well as the internal buses of I/O
modules on the FFCS status display window.
2. Switch off the power supply of the node that to be exchanged.
3. Leave the ESB cable connected, then remove the branch connector from the SB401for ESB bus 1.
4. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that there is no abnormality occurredother than the node to be exchanged.
5. Leave the ESB cable connected, then remove the branch connector from the SB401for ESB bus 2.
6. Exchange the node. And confirm that the SB401 address is correct.
7. Connect branch connector to the new SB401.
8. Switch on the node power supply.
9. Confirm that the exchanged node is running properly on the FFCS status displaywindow.
■ Procedure of Adding a Local Node : FFCS £1. Check the status of the nodes on both sides, as well as the internal buses of I/O
modules on the FFCS status display window.
2. The branch connector of the node of SB401 needs to be changed to the type withoutterminator. For the dual-redundant bus, this should be performed one side by oneside.
3. Set the new node address before switching on the node power supply. Make sure theaddress setting is correct and not identical. The branch connector with terminatorshould be used if the node is at the end of the bus.
4. Connect the SB401 on the left side of the added node to ESB bus 1.
5. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that the ESB bus 1 is running properly.
6. Do the same to the ESB bus 2.
A7-54<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
7. On “System View”, add a new node and configure the node.
8. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that the newly configured node is runningproperly.
SEE ALSO
For more information about the “System View”, see the following:
“■ Creating a New Node: KFCS2/KFCS/FFCS £” in F1.5.1, “Creating a Node” in “Reference (IM33S01B30-01E) PART F”
For more information about the “ESB bus branch connectors”, see the following:
“■ Connecting EBS Bus Conector Cales : KFCS2/KFCS £” in A4.3.3, “Connecting the Bus Cablesto KFCS2/KFCS”
■ Procedure of Exchanging Remote Node : FFCS £1. Check the status of the nodes on both sides, as well as the internal buses of I/O
modules on the FFCS status display window.
2. Switch off the power supply of the node that to be exchanged.
3. Leave the ER bus cable connected, then remove the T-type branch connector fromthe EB501 for ER bus 1.
4. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that there is no abnormality occurredother than the node to be exchanged.
5. Leave the ER bus cable connected, then remove the T-type branch connector from theEB501 for ER bus 2.
6. Exchange the node. And confirm that the EB501 address is correct.
7. Connect branch connector to the new SB401.
8. Switch on the node power supply.
9. Confirm that the exchanged node is running properly on the FFCS status displaywindow.
■ Procedure of Adding a Remote Node : FFCS £1. Make sure the power of the node unit to be added is off.
2. Set the addresses of the two EB501 modules that are in dual-redundant configuration.For user-defined settings, node numbers need to be set. The addresses for left andright sides are different.
3. At first, connect the standby side. Disconnect the ER bus and connect it to the EB501of the added remote node. Make sure that the left side and right side are not reversed.
4. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that all nodes are running properly exceptthe newly added one.
5. Then connect the ER bus of the other side. Pull out the EB401 so as to switch thecontrol right. At this moment, the communication stops for two or three seconds.
6. Disconnect the ER bus of the newly standby side bus and connect it to EB501. Thenconfirm on FFCS status display window that all nodes are running properly.
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-55
IM 33Q06C20-01E
7. Switch on the added node power.
8. On “System View”, add a new node and configure the node.
9. Confirm on the FFCS status display window that the newly configured node is runningproperly.
SEE ALSO
For more information about the node number setting, see the following:
A6.3.8, “ER Bus Interface Slave Module (EB501)”
For more information about the “ER bus branch connector”, see the following:
“■ Connecting ER Bus Conector Cales : KFCS2/KFCS £” in A4.3.3, “Connecting the Bus Cables toKFCS2/KFCS”
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A7-56<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
A7.5.3 Parts Requiring Periodical Replacement (Parts HavingDefined Life Spans)Model FFCS has components with a useful life that need to be replaced periodically.The parts having defined life spans, which can be replaced by the user are availableas spare parts and consumables. Purchase and replace as necessary.
Read this section thoroughly and carry out the periodical replacement.
IMPORTANT
Precautions for parts having defined life spans
• The term”Parts having defined life spans” refers to parts that are expected to wear out orbreak down within 10 years from initial use under normal conditions of use and storage.Therefore, parts with expected life spans of 10 years or more are excluded here.
• The recommended replacement cycle is the cycle indicated for preventive mainte-nance. It provides no guarantee against the accidental failures.
• The recommended replacement cycle is merely a guideline. The actual replacementcycle depends on the usage conditions.
• The recommended replacement cycle is subject to change according to actual fieldresults.
■ Parts Having Defined Life Spans : FFCS £The table below shows the recommended part replacement cycles for preventive maintenance.Parts indicated by a “Yes” in the “Replacement by user” column of the table can be replaced bythe user. Parts indicated by a “No” in the “Replacement by user” column cannot be replaced bythe user, so please contact the Yokogawa’s sales agents for replacement.
Table Periodic Replacement Parts Having Defined Life Spans : FFCS £
Part name Part number
Recommended replacement
cycle
Replace-ment
by userRemarks
Battery pack S9129FA
3 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 30 deg. C or lower on average (*1)
Power supply module(100-120V AC)
PW481 8 years No At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
Power supply module(220-240V AC)
PW482 8 years No At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
Power supply module(24V DC)
PW484 8 years No At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
1.5 years Yes At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower on average (*1)
9 months Yes At the ambient temperature of 50 deg. C or lower on average (*1)
Aluminum electrolytic capacitor (in a power supply module)
(PW481) 8 years No100 - 120 V AC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
(PW482) 8 years No220 - 240 V AC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
(PW484) 8 years No 24 V DC. At the ambient temperature of 40 deg. C or lower (*1)
Fuse built in a power supply module
S9109VK 8 years No For PW481
S9109VK 8 years No For PW482
A1546EF 8 years No For PW484
A070504E.EPS
*1: The ambient temperature varies with FFCS installation conditions. When FFCS is installed in the cabinet, the ambienttemperature means the temperature inside the cabinet, not outside the cabinet.
12th Edition : Jun.27,2007-00
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-57
IM 33Q06C20-01E 9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
A7.5.4 How to Replace PartsThis chapter describes replacement of battery pack placed in the processor module.
■ How to Replace Battery Pack : FFCS £
CAUTION
• Use only a battery specified by Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
• Wear a wrist strap when handling a battery pack.
• If the memory contents must not be cleared when replacing the battery unit, makesure you leave the power to the FFCS turned on. Turning OFF the battery switchwhen the power is off results in the loss of all the memory contents in the processormodule.
A7-58<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
● Battery Life Label : FFCS £
A battery for keeping the contents of main memories is placed in the processor module. Onthe front cover of the module, a label is stuck to indicate the expiration date of the battery.
The battery life varies with the ambient temperatures.
A070505E.EPS
START/STOP
BATTERY
RCV 1 2SND 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8HRDY RDY CTL COPY
BUS1
BUS2
ON
OFF
Processor module
Battery life label
Date of battery life
START/STOP
BATTERYON
OFF
PORT
DOMST A
CN1
CN2
START/STOP switch
Battery
Battery ON/OFF switch
Behind front cover
Connector for battery
ON OFF
BATTERY LIFE(AVE.ROOM TEMP 30 �C MAX.)
2007.10
Figure Battery Life Label : FFCS £
SEE ALSO
For more information about battery replacement, see the following:
A7.5.3, “Parts Requiring Periodic Replacement (Parts Having Defined Life Spans)”
<A7. Maintenance of FCS> A7-59
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
■ Replacing Battery : FFCS £How to replace the battery is explained as follows.
● Procedure for Removing battery : FFCS £
1. Open the front cover of the processor module.
2. Turn the battery ON/OFF switch to OFF position. A stick of insulation material shouldbe used to toggle the battery switch.
3. Disconnect the battery cable from the connector (displayed as CN2).
The battery cable connector has a self-locking elastic clutch. When pulling out theconnector, it is necessary to push the clutch to unlock it.
4. Pull out the battery pack straightly.
● Procedure for Installing battery : FFCS £
1. Place the battery to the specified position on the processor module.
2. Connect the battery cable to the connector. Make sure the connection is firm and thered wire is facing upward.
3. Turn the battery ON/OFF switch to ON position.
4. Put the front cover back.
5. Stick the battery life label to the front cover.
A070506E.EPS
Processor module
Battery pack
Cable connector
Cover
Elastic clutch
CN2 connector
Battery pack
Cable (red facing upward)
Battery ON/OFFswitch
Battery life label (accessory)
Figure Replacement of Battery : FFCS £
A7-60<A7. Maintenance of FCS>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
IMPORTANT
• Replace a battery pack when the validity period expires.
• Wear a wrist strap when handling a battery pack.
• Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.
• Do not throw a battery pack in a fire.
• Do not disassemble a battery pack.
• Do not use a battery pack other than the model designated by Yokogawa.
• In the battery pack, the nickel metal hydride cells are used, thus the battery is re-chargeable.
CustomerMaintenanceParts List
CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CMPL A-1
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Model PFCS Field Control StationModel PFCD Duplexed Field Control StationModel PRK71 I/O Expansion RackProcess I/O Module NestsProcess I/O Modules
CMPL 33Q06C30-31E
CMPL 33Q06C30-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2001(YK)5th Edition : Dec. 2007(YK)
1See pages 2 and 3
2See pages 4 and 5
3See pages 6, 7 and 8
C3031F01E.EPS
1
2
3
PFCDPFCSPRK71
_
Note * : For Suffix code details (indecated by � ), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.
___
_
Duplexed Field Control StationField Control Station
I/O Expansion Rack ( for Models PFCD-�5���* and PFCS-�5���*)
Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty
C3031PL01E.EPS
CMPL A-2
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E 2nd Edition Dec.2003-00
To C
To D
To A
To B
CD A
B
22
13
12
17 18
16
15
14
19 20
21
11
10
9
53
4
1
2
7
6
8
C3031F02E.EPS
CMPL A-3
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E 5th Edition Dec.2007-00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
89
10111213
1415
16
1718192021
22
BelowPW701PW702PW704Below
S9578VKS9504VKBelowPW701PW702
PW704BelowS9578VKS9504VKT9085DA
BelowCP701CP703BelowCP701
CP703T9070LQBelowS9762UKS9767UK
S9763UKY9306LKS9941DBAIP521S9764UK
S9628UKAIP521S9764UKS9628UKT9080VR
S9971DBS9766UKS9971DBS9766UKT9085DG
YCB148
YCB118
Note *� : In �, enter 1 in using a single VL net or V net and 2 in using a redundant VL net o V net. This terminator is required when the PFCS is the last device. �** : For suffix code details (indicated by �), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets.
1
1
1
1
1
11
311
11
1
11
1
*�
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
311
11
1111
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
311
11
1111
2
Power Supply UnitFor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply For 24 V DC Power Supply
Fuse
For PW701and PW702For PW704
Power Supply UnitFor 100 to 120 V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply For 24 V DC Power Supply
FuseFor PW701and PW702For PW704
Dummy Plate
CPU Card For Standard Type
For Enhanced Type and Compact TypeCPU CardFor Standard Type
For Enhanced TypeDummy PlatePower Distribution Board UnitFor 100 to 120 V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply
For 24 V DC Power SupplyB.H.Screw, M3 × 6 with Toothed LockwasherContact Output UnitVL net and V net Coupler UnitT-type Connector of VL net and V net for PFCS,PFCD
Connector Unit for V net (10Base5 cable)VL net and V net Coupler UnitT-type Connector of VL net and V net for PFCS,PFCDConnector Unit for V net (10Base5 cable)Dummy Plate
Battery Back Up UnitBattery Assembly Unit (see page CMPL A-10)Battery Back Up UnitBattery Assembly Unit (see page CMPL A-10)Dummy Plate
V net and VL net Terminator (for 10Base2 cable, option code : /*�-TE)
V net Terminator (for 10Base5 cable)
1
1
1
1
11
3111
1
11
1
*�
1
1
1
1
1
11
3111
1
11
1
*�
1
1
1
1
11
3111
11
11
1
*�
1
1
1
1
11
311
11
1
11
1
*�
1
1
1
1
1
11
3111
11
11
1
*�
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
PF
CS
-��
1�**
PF
CS
-��
2�**
PF
CS
-��
3�**
PF
CS
-��
4�**
PF
CD
-��
5�**
PF
CS
-H�
7�**
PF
CS
-H�
8�**
PF
CD
-H�
6�**
C3031PL02E.EPS
CMPL A-4
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E
Bare Nest Assemblyand
Model PRK71 (I/O Expansion Rack)
1
2
3
4
5
86
7
10
13
11
129(10 through 15)
15
14
9(10 through 15)
C3031F03E.EPS
2nd Edition Dec.2003-00
CMPL A-5
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E
12345
6789
101112131415
_
T9080EET9085BRT9085BSY9306LB
T9085AZY9306LBS9049PMPRK71
T9085BVT9085BWY9306LBS9049PMT9085BXY9405LB
15112
21081
126412
Bare Nest AssemblyI/O Connector CoverBN Bus Connector Cover
CoverB. H. Screw, M3�6
BracketB.H.Screw, M3�6Insulating BushI/O Expansion Rack(when five I/O module nest install type) Expansion BaseBracketB.H.Screw, M3�6Insulating BushPlateB.H.Screw, M4�5
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty
C3031PL03E.EPS
2nd Edition Dec.2003-00
CMPL A-6
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E
Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module
A
21
22
23
To A
78 10
9
1112
14
15 16A
13
18
20
19
A
17
24
25
26
28
27
5
6
4
1
2
3
293231
30
33
C3031F04E.EPS
5th Edition Dec.2007-00
CMPL A-7
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E
[[[[[Option]]]]]
5th Edition Dec.2007-00
1234
5
6
789
1011
121314
1516171819
2021
22
23242526
2728
29
30313233
AMN11T9081EFT9081FBT9081CN
BelowAAM10AAM11AAM11BAAM21
AAM21JAPM11AAM50AAM51
S9393UK
AMN21–––
BelowS9165VM
A1667MRG9307MWAMN31_
_
__
AMN32__
_
BelowAMN33AMN34
Below
ACM11ACM12ACF11
AMC80T9081CVAMN51T9081PVY9406LB
G9311ABBelowACM21ACM22ACM71AMN52
T9081PVY9406LBG9311ABACP71
Note : * See page CMPL A-8 table1 and page CMPL A-9 table2
–––1
–
–
––––16
1___
_____
__
_
___
4
4_
_
_
44_
Nest for Analog I/O ModuleDummy Frame (as required)Dummy Case (as required )Sheet (accessory)
Analog I/O ModuleCurrent / Voltage Input ModuleCurrent / Voltage Input ModuleCurrent / Voltage Input Module mV, Thermocouple and RTD Input Module
mV, Thermocouple and RTD Input ModulePulse Input ModuleCurrent Output ModuleCurrent / Voltage Output Module
Temperature Compensation Module for ThermocoupleInput (for Models AAM21 and AAM21J, option code : /RJ )
Nest for Relay I/O Module*Relay I/O Module*
Unit Assembly*Printed Board Assembly*Relay
For Model ADT16A
For Model ADT16BScrew
Nest for Terminal I/O Module*Multiplexer Module*Digital I/O Module*
Unit Assembly*Printed Board Assembly*
Nest for Connector I/O Module*Digital I/O Module*
Unit Assembly*
Printed Board Assembly*Nest
Nest for Communication ModuleNest for Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module (for CS 3000)
Communication Moduleor Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module
RS-232C Communication ModuleRS-422/RS-485 Communication ModuleField-bus Communication Module
Multipoint Control Analog I/O ModuleDummy Plate (as required)Nest for Communication Card
Dummy Plate (as required)B. H. Screw, M4�6
WasherGeneral-purpose Communication Card
RS-232C Communication CardRS-422/RS-485 Communication CardEthernet Communication Module
Nest for PROFIBUS Communication Module
Dummy Plate (as required)B.H.Screw, M4�6Washer
PROFIBUS Communication Module
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty
C3031PL04E.EPS
CMPL A-8
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E
Table1. Type of I/O Modules
AMN21(Item 7)
AMN31(Item13)
AMN31(Item13)
I/O Module Unit Assembly Printed Board Assembly
Model Description Model Description
Item 9Item 8 (Relay I/O Module)
Item 14 (Multiplexer Module)
Item 14 (Digital I/O Module)
ADM15R
ADM55R
AMM12T (*1)
AMM22M (*1)
AMM22T (*1)
AMM22TJ (*1)
AMM42T
AMM52T
ADM11T
ADM12T
ADM51T
ADM52T
Relay Input Module
Relay Output Module
Voltage Input Multiplexer Module
mV Input Multiplexer Module
Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module
Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module
2-Wire TransmitterInput Multiplexer Module
OutputMultiplexer Module
Contact Input Module
Contact Input Module
Contact Output Module
Contact Output Module
Item 15
Item 15
ADT16A Terminal Block
ADT16B
AMT16M
AMT16M
AMT16T
AMT16T
AMT16M
AMT16M
ADT16
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
ADT32 Terminal Block
ADT16 Terminal Block
ADT32 Terminal Block
Model Description
Item 10
Item 16
Item 16
ADM15 Relay Input Card
ADM55
AMM12
AMM22
AMM22
AMM22J
AMM42
AMM52
ADM11
Relay Output Card
Voltage Input Multiplexer Card
mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card
mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card
mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card
AMM32TRTD Input Multiplexer Module AMT16R Terminal Block AMM32
RTD Input Multiplexer Card
AMM32TJRTD Input Multiplexer Module AMT16R Terminal Block AMM32J
RTD Input Multiplexer Card
2-Wire Transmitter Input Multiplexer Card
Output Multiplexer Card
Contact Input Card
ADM12 Contact Input Card
ADM51 Contact Output Card
ADM52 Contact Output Card
NestModel
C3031F05E.EPS
4th Edition Dec.2006-00
Note *1 : Can also be installed in AMN32 nest.
CMPL A-9
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E
Table 2 Type of I/O Modules
AMN32(Item17)
I/O Module Unit Assembly Printed Board Assembly
Model Description Model Description
Item 18 (Digital I/O Module)
ADM11C
ADM12C
ADM51C
ADM52C
Contact Input Module
Contact Input Module
Contact Output Module
Contact Output Module
Item 19
ADC16 Connector Block
ADC32 Connector Block
ADC16 Connector Block
ADC32 Connector Block
Model Description
Item 20
Item 18 (Multiplexer I/O Module) Item 19 Item 20
AMM12CVoltage Input Multiplexer Module with PS Connector
AMC16M Connector Block AMM12Voltage Input Multiplexer Card
AMM22CmV Input MultiplexerModule
AMC16M Connector Block AMM22JmV, TermocoupleInput Multiplexer Card
AMM25CmV Input MultiplexerModule with Thermo-couple Interface
AMC16T Connector Block AMM22JmV, TermocoupleInput Multiplexer Card
AMM32CRTD Input Multiplexer Module
AMC16R Connector Block AMM32RTD Input Multiplexer Card
AMM32CJRTD Input Multiplexer Module
AMC16R Connector Block AMM32JRTD Input Multiplexer Card
ADM11 Contact Input Card
ADM12 Contact Input Card
ADM51 Contact Output Card
ADM52 Contact Output Card
NestModel
C3031F06E.EPS
2nd Edition Dec.2003-00
CMPL A-10
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C30-31E 5th Edition Dec.2007-00Printed in Japan
Part No. S9766UKBattery Pack Assembly
3
1C3031F07E.EPS
2
123
S9766UKS9765UKY9306LB
112
Battery Pack AssemblyBattery PackB.H.Screw, M3�6
Item Part No. DescriptionQty
C3031PL05E.EPS
Subject to change without notice.
CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CustomerMaintenanceParts List
CMPL A-11
Models AFS10S, AFS10D,AFG10S and AFG10DField Control UnitDuplexed Field Control Unit(for RIO, 19" Rack Mountable Type)
CMPL 33Q06C20-31E
CMPL 33Q06C20-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2001(YK)5th Edition : Jan. 2006(YK)
1
C2031F01E.EPS
Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Duplexed Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Duplexed Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)
1 AFS10SAFG10SAFS10DAFG10D
Item Model DescriptionQty
C2031PL01E.EPS
CMPL A-12
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00
1819
1516
14
17
1 A
2
9
1011
21
2220
12
13
To A
43
5
C2031F02E.EPS
CMPL A-13
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00
12345
9
10
1112131415
161718
19202122
T9070CKT9080JTS9024PBS9022PB
AIP601
BelowS9321UKS9322UKS9323UKY9306LE
Y9301WLS9371DBS9528VKT9080MMAIP511
AIP512S9359UKT9080MKAIP511AIP512
S9359UKT9080WXY9306TYS9049PM
11222
1
2
2141
11
1288
FilterBracket Assembly
PlungerGrommet
Fan Unit Assembly
Power Distribution Board Assemblyfor 100 to 120V AC Power Supplyfor 220 to 240V AC Power Supplyfor 24V DC Power Supply
B.H. Screw, M3�6
WasherPrinted Board Assembly NST EXTIF
FuseDummy PlateRIO bus Coupler Assembly
RIO bus Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for RIO busDummy PlateRIO bus Coupler AssemblyRIO bus Coupler Assembly
Connector Unit for RIO busBracketTapping Screw ( M3 � 6 )Grommet
11222
1
2
2141
11
1288
11222
1
2
21411
1
1
1288
11222
1
2
21411
1
1
1288
11222
1
2
2141
11
1
1288
11222
1
2
2141
11
1
1288
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
AF
G10
S-H
2*A
FS
10S
-H2*
AF
G10
S-H
4*A
FS
10S
-H4*
AF
G10
D*
AF
S10
D*
Note : * For suffix code details , refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets.C2031PL02E.EPS
CMPL A-14
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 3rd Edition Dec.2003-00
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
To A or B
To C or L
ToD, E, J or K
ToE, F, I or J
To L
To G or I
A
B
HIJK
L
CDEF
G
C2031F03E.EPS
CMPL A-15
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 3rd Edition Dec.2003-00
1
23
456
789
10
AIP501AIP502
S9628UKBelow
PW301
PW302PW304
S9325UKS9400UKY9306LB
T9080LKRB301CP345
T9080LP
V net Coupler AssemblyV net Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for V netPower Supply Unit
for 100 to 120V AC Power Supply
for 220 to 240V AC Power Supplyfor 24V DC Power Supply
Battery AssemblyBattery KitB.H. Screw, M3 � 6
Dummy PlateRIO bus Master Interface CardProcessor CardDummy Plate
2
21
112
1111
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
2
21
112
1111
222
112
222
222
112
222
AF
G10
S
AF
S10
S
AF
G10
D
AF
S10
D
C2031PL03E.EPS
CMPL A-16
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C20-31E 3rd Edition Dec.2003-00Printed in Japan
1 2
C2031F04E.EPS
�12
S9364UKS9528VKT9070CK
111
Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter
Item Part No. DescriptionQty
C2031PL04E.EPS
CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CustomerMaintenanceParts List
CMPL A-17
Models AFS20S, AFS20D,AFG20S and AFG20DField Control UnitDuplexed Field Control Unit(for RIO, with Cabinet)CMPL 33Q06C21-31E
CMPL 33Q06C21-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2001(YK)5th Edition : Jan. 2006(YK)
1
2
2
2
C2131F01E.EPS
12
Note:*Not included Models AFG20S, AFS20S, AFG20D and AFS20D. 2 panels are necessary when attaching to both sides.
ACB2P
1
Field Control UnitSide Panel* (separately order)
Item Model DescriptionQty
C2131PL01E.EPS
CMPL A-18
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
8
7
5
6
12
3
4C2131F02E.EPS
CMPL A-19
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
12345
6
7
8
G9307EMS9559UKG9307EM
Below
S9411UKS9431UKS9413UKY9406LK
BelowS9412UKS9432UKS9414UKY9406LK
18141
1
1
1
Field Control Unit (see pages A-22 through A-25)Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16Connector Unit for RIO busHex. H. Bolt, M5�16Nest Power Distribution Board Assembly
For 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
B.H. Screw with Toothed Lock washer, M4�6
Nest Power Distribution Board AssemblyFor 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
B.H. Screw withToothed Lock washer, M4�6
Item Part No. DescriptionQty
C2131PL02E.EPS
CMPL A-20
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
A
1
68
7
17
910
12
11
5
4
3
2
13
15
14
16
View A
2221
23
18
19
20
24
C2131F03E.EPS
CMPL A-21
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
1
23
456
789
10
1112
1314151617
1819202122
2324
S9324UKS9511AT
S9725VMY9306LB
BelowS9566UKS9567UK
S9313UKT9080PXG9311ACY9406LK
Below
S9566UKS9567UKS9313UKT9080PXG9311AC
Y9406LKT9080PZY9314LBT9019FFG9307EM
T9080QCY9314LBT9019FFT9080PZY9314LB
T9019FFT9080EE
Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module
(option, see pages A-28 through A-31)Power Distribution Board Frame Assembly Printed Board Assembly
Relay B.H.Screw,M3�6Main Power Distribution Board Assembly For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power Supply
For 24V DC Power Supply Shaft WasherB.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Main Power Distribution Board Assembly
For 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply Shaft Washer
B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14 RetainerHex.H.Bolt,M5�16
Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14 RetainerDummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14
RetainerCover(as required)
11
111
111
1114
11111
1–
Item Part No. Description
Mod
el
Qty
11
111
1111
11
1
4
11
1–
AF
�20
�-H
�1�
*3
AF
�20
D-H
42�
*3
Note:*For suffix code details (indicated by �), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.C2131PL03E.EPS
CMPL A-22
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E
Field Control Unit Processor Card
3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
C
To C
9
8
7To A and B
10
2
1
4
3
A
B
C2131F04E.EPS
5
6
CMPL A-23
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
1
23
456
789
10
AIP501AIP502S9628UK
BelowPW301
PW302PW304S9325UKS9400UKY9306LB
T9080LKRB301CP345T9080LP
V net Coupler AssemblyV net Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for V netPower Supply UnitFor 100 to 120V AC Power Supply
For 220 to 240V AC Pwer SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
Battery AssemblyBattery KitB.H.Screw, M3�6
Dummy PlateRIO bus Master Interface CardProcessor CardDummy Plate
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
2
21
112
1111
222
212
222
222
212
222
AF
G20
S
AF
G20
D
AF
S20
S
AF
S20
D
2
21
112
1111
C2131PL04E.EPS
CMPL A-24
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00
Field Control Unit
1617
1314
12
15
1110
8
9
6
5
7
1
C2131F05E.EPS
CMPL A-25
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00
15678
910111213
141516
17
AIP601T9080KWY9406LBY9406LBS9612AT
S9528VKT9080JQY9306LBT9080MMAIP511
AIP512S9359UKT9080MKAIP511AIP512S9359UK
21121
91111
111
1
Fan Unit AssemblyDummy PlateB.H.Screw, M4�6B.H.Screw, M3�6Printed Board Assembly (External Interface Unit)
FuseCoverB.H.Screw, M3�6Dummy PlateRIO bus Coupler Assembly (for Model AF�*20S-H4)
RIO bus Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for RIO busDummy Plate (for Model AF�*20S-H2)RIO bus Coupler AssemblyRIO bus Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for RIO bus
21121
9111
11
11
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
AF
�*2
0S
AF
�*2
0D
Note : *For suffix code details (indicated by �),refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.C2131PL05E.EPS
CMPL A-26
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E
1
12
2
4
3
To D
To C
To B
To A
DC
BA
96
5
8
7
10
C2131F06E.EPS
3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
CMPL A-27
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E
1
234
BelowS9415UK
S9417UK
Y9406LKS9559UKG9307EM
2
214
I/O Power Distribution Board AssemblyFor 100 to 120V AC Power Supply and220 to 240V AC Power Supply For 24V DC Power Supply
B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Connector Unit for RIO busHex.H.Bolt M5�16
Item Part No. DescriptionQty
C2131PL06E.EPS
3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
5
6
789
10
Note : *For option code details (indicated by �), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.
BelowPW401PW402PW404
T9081AY
RB401T9081AWT9080EE
1 to 3
1 to 3
1 to 31 to 3
Power Supply UnitFor 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
Dummy Plate
RIO bus Slave Interface CardDummy PlateCover (as required)Process I/O Module Nest andProcess I/O Module (see pages A-28 through A-31)
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionO
ptio
n C
ode
/�*–
NS
F1
/�*–
NS
R1
/�*–
NS
F2
/�*–
NS
R2
/�*–
ND
F4
/�*–
ND
R4
Qty
2 to 6
1 to 31 to 3
2 to 6
2 to 6
[ Option ]
C2131PL07E.EPS
CMPL A-28
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E
Process I/O Module Nest and Process I/O Module
5
2
1
3
4
6
21
A
22 23
To A
13
A
16
14
15
17
A
20
18
19
7
128
9
1011
C2131F07E.EPS
3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
CMPL A-29
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
1
234
5
6
78
9
10
1112
1314
15161718
192021
22
23
Note: *For quantity details (indicated by ) , refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.
AMN11AMN12T9081EFT9081FBT9081CN
BelowAAM10AAM11AAM11BAAM21AAM21JAPM11
AAM50AAM51S9393UK
AMN21ADM15R
ADM55RADT16AADT16BS9165VMA1667MR
G9307MWADM15ADM55AMN32
AMN31
BelowAMN33AMN34
Below
ACM11ACM12ACF11AMC80T9081CV
1
111616
111
Nest for Analog I/O ModuleHigh-Speed Nest for I/O Analog Module
Dummy Frame (as required)Dummy Case (as required)Sheet
Analog I/O ModuleCurrent/Voltage Input ModuleCurrent/Voltage Input ModuleCurrent/Voltage Input Module (supports BRAIN)mV,Thermocouple and RTD Input ModulemV,Thermocouple and RTD Input ModulePulse Input Module
Current Output ModuleCurrent/Voltage Output Module
Temperature Compensation Module for ThermocoupleInput (for Model AAM21, option:/RJ)
Nest for Relay I/O ModuleRelay Input Module
Relay Output ModuleTerminal Block (for ADM15R)Terminal Block (for ADM55R)
Relay (for ADT16A)Relay (for ADT16B)
ScrewRelay Input Card (for ADM15R)Relay Output Card (for ADM55R)
Nest for Connector I/O ModuleDigital I/O Module
Unit AssemblyPrinted Board Assembly
Nest for Terminal I/O ModuleMultiplexer ModuleDigital I/O Module
Unit AssemblyPrinted Board Assembly
NestFor Communication ModuleFor Multipoint Control Analog I/O Module
Communication Module or Multipoint Control Analog I/O ModuleRS-232C Communication ModuleRS-422/RS-485 Communication ModuleField-bus Communication ModuleMultipoint Control Analog I/O Module
Dummy Plate (as required)
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty*
See Table 1(page A-30)
See Table 2(page A-31)
C2131PL08E.EPS
CMPL A-30
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
Model(Item14)
Model(Item15)Model
(Item16)
DescriptionDescription
Description
Dig
ital I
/O M
odul
e
ADM11C
ADM12C
ADM51C
ADM52C
Contact Input Module(16 points, connector type)
Contact Input Module(32 points, connector type)
Contact Output Module(16 points, connector type)
Contact Output Module(32 points, connector type)
ADC16
ADM11
ADC32
ADM12
ADC16
ADM51
ADC32
ADM52
Connector Block
Connector Block
Connector Block
Connector Block
Contact Input Card
Contact Input Card
Contact Output Card
Contact Output Card
Mul
tiple
xer
Mod
ule
(Con
nect
or T
ype)
AMM12C
AMM22C
AMM25C
AMM32C
Voltage Inpurt Multiplexer Module with PS Connector
mV Input Multipexer Module (16 points, connector type)
mV Input Multiplexer Module with Thermocouple Interface(15 points, connector type)
RTD Input Multiplexer Module (16 points, connector type)
AMC16M
AMM12
AMC16M
AMM22J
AMC16T
AMM22J
AMC16R
AMM32
Connector Block
Connector Block
Connector Block
Connector Block
Contact Input Card
Contact Input Card
Contact Input Card
Contact Intput Card
AMM32CJRTD Input Multiplexer Module(16 points, connector type)
AMC16R
AMM32J
Connector Block
Contact Inputt Card
Table1. Type of I/O Modules into the Model AMN32 (Item13)
C2131F09E.EPS
CMPL A-31
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E 3rd Edition Dec. 2003-00
Model(Item 18)
Model(Item19)Model
(Item20)Description
Description
Description
Mul
tiple
xer
Mod
ule
16 p
oint
s, T
erm
inal
Typ
e an
d S
can
Per
iod
1 S
ec.
AMM12T
AMM22M
AMM22T
AMM22TJ
Voltage Input Multiplexer Module
mV Input Multiplexer Module
Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module
Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Module
AMT16M
AMM12
AMT16M
AMM22
AMT16T
AMM22
AMT16T
AMM22J
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Voltage Input Multiplexer Card
mV,Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card
mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card
mV, Thermocouple Input Multiplexer Card
AMM32TJ RTD Input Multiplexer ModuleAMT16R
AMM32J
Terminal Block
RTD Input Multiplexer Card
AMM32T RTD Input Multiplexer ModuleAMT16R
AMM32
Terminal Block
RTD Input Multiplexer Card
Dig
ital I
/O M
odul
e
AMM42T
AMM52T
ADM11T
ADM12T
ADM51T
ADM52T
2-Wire Transmitter Input Multiplexer Module
Output Multiplexer Module
Contact Input Module(16 points, terminal type)
Contact Input Module(32 points, terminal type)
Contact Output Module(16 points, terminal type)
Contact Output Module(32 points, terminal type)
AMT16M
AMM42
AMT16M
AMM52
ADT16
ADM11
ADT32
ADM12
ADT16
ADM51
ADT32
ADM52
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
Terminal Block
2-Wire Transmitter Input Multiplexer Card
Output Multiplexer Card
Contact Input Card
Contact Input Card
Contact Output Card
Contact Output Card
Table2. Type of I/O Modules into the Model AMN31 (Item17)
C2131F10E.EPS
CMPL A-32
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06C21-31E
Door Fan Assemly and Accessory Assembly
11
1312
9
7
6
8
5
C2131F08E.EPS
1
10
5th Edition Jan. 2006-00Printed in Japan
1567
89
10
111213
AIP601T9070CB
Below
S9441DD
S9442DDY9306LBY9408LK
S9090UG
S9361UKS9528VKT9070CB
4221
44
1
112
Fan Unit AssemblyAir FilterFan Frame Assembly
Printed Board AssemblyFor Front Door
For Rear DoorB.H.Screw,M3�6
B.H.Screw with Toothed Lockwasher, M4�8Temperature Sensor Assembly(with front door)
Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty
C2131PL09E.EPS
CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CustomerMaintenanceParts List
CMPL A-33
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Models AFS30S, AFS30DAFG30S and AFG30DField Control UnitDuplexed Field Control Unit(for FIO, 19" Rack Mountable Type)CMPL 33Q06N10-31E
CMPL 33Q06N10-31E1st Edition : Sep. 2001(YK)5th Edition : Jan. 2006(YK)
1
N1031F01E.EPS
Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Duplexed Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)Duplexed Field Control Unit (19" Rack Mountable Type)
1 AFS30SAFS30DAFG30SAFG30D
����
Item Model DescriptionQty
N1031PL01E.EPS
CMPL A-34
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00
Models AFS30S, AFS30D, AFG30S and AFG30DField Control Unit
15
14
16
1 A
2
9
1011
19
20
18
12
13
To A
43
5
17
N1031F02E.EPS
14a
CMPL A-35
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00
12345
9
10
11121314
14a
151617181920
T9070CKT9080JTS9024PBS9022PBAIP601
BelowS9321UKS9322UKS9323UKY9306LE
Y9301WLS9371DBS9528VKT9080MMS9039FA
AIP532T9080MKAIP532T9082KDY9306TYS9049PM
FilterBracket Assembly
PlungerGrommet
Fan Unit Assembly
Power Distribution Board Assemblyfor 100 to 120V AC Power Supplyfor 220 to 240V AC Power Supplyfor 24V DC Power Supply
B.H. Screw, M3�6
WasherPrinted Board Assembly NST EXTIF
FuseDummy PlateRS-422 Unit(for Models AFS30D-HE and AFG30D-HE)
ESB bus Coupler AssemblyDummy PlateESB bus Coupler AssemblyBracketTapping Screw ( M3�6 )Grommet
11222
1
2
2141
11288
11222
1
2
21411
1
1288
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
AF
S30
S-H
2*A
FG
30S
*
AF
S30
S-H
4*A
FS
30D
*A
FG
30S
-H4*
AF
G30
D*
Note : * For suffix code details , refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets.N1031PL02E.EPS
CMPL A-36
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00
3
To C or K
7
ToD, H or J
A
B
GHJ
K
CDE
12
To K
4
5
6
1
To A or B
2
F
ToE or H
8
11
To G or F
N1031F03E.EPS
9
10
CMPL A-37
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 5th Edition Jan. 2006-00
1
23
456
789
10——1112
AIP501AIP502S9628UK
BelowPW301
PW302PW304S9325UKS9400UKY9306LB
T9080LKSB301SB311
A1397WLG9320FJS9073PBCP345T9080LP
V net Coupler AssemblyV net Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for V netPower Supply Unit
for 100 to 120V AC Power Supply
for 220 to 240V AC Power Supplyfor 24V DC Power Supply
Battery AssemblyBattery KitB.H. Screw, M3 � 6
Dummy PlateESB Bus Interface Master ModuleESB Bus Interface Master Module(with SOE communication function,for Models AFS30D-HE and AFG30D-HE)
Cable Asembly (for SB311)Clamp (not shown, for A1397WL)Band (not shown, for A1397WL)Processor CardDummy Plate
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
2
21
112
11
11
222
112
222
2222
AF
S30
SA
FG
30S
AF
S30
DA
FG
30D
N1031PL03E.EPS
CMPL A-38
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N10-31E 3rd Edition Dec.2003-00Printed in Japan
Accessory Assembly
1 2
N1031F04E.EPS
�12
S9364UKS9528VKT9070CK
111
Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter
Item Part No. DescriptionQty
N1031PL04E.EPS
CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CustomerMaintenanceParts List
CMPL A-39
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Models AFS40S, AFS40DAFG40S and AFG40DField Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)Duplexed field Control Unit (for FIO, with Cabinet)
CMPL 33Q06N20-31E
CMPL 33Q06N20-31E1st Edition : Sep. 2001(YK)6th Edition : Jan. 2006(YK)
1
2
2
2
N2031F01E.EPS
12IM 33Y06K01-90E 1 Explosion Protect Manual (option code : /ATDOC)*2
Note : *1 Not included Models AFS40S, AFS40D, AFG40S and AFG40D.2 panels are necessary when attaching to both sides.
*2 For suffix code details, refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets.
�ACB2P
1�
Field Control UnitSide Panel*1 (separately order)
Item Model DescriptionQty
N2031PL01E.EPS
CMPL A-40
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00
12
4
3
6
5
7
8 N2031F02E.EPS
CMPL A-41
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00
123
45
67
8
Note : * For the composed parts of Models ANB10S and ANB10D details, refer to CMPL 33Q06Q10-31E.
�G9307EM
BelowS9894UKS9895UK
S9896UKG9307EM
BelowS9881UKS9884UK
S9882UKG9307EM
BelowANB10S*ANB10D*G9307EM
181
11
40 to 5
0 to 20
Field Control Unit (see pages CMPL-46 through CMPL-49)Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16FCU Power Distribution Board Assembly
For 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power Supply
For 24V DC Power SupplyHex. H. Bolt, M5�16Primary Power Distribution Board Assembly (Front)
For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power Supply
For 24V DC Power SupplyHex. H. Bolt, M5�16Process I/O Node Unit for ESB bus
For SingleFor Dual-Redundant
Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16
Item Part No. DescriptionQty
N2031PL02E.EPS
CMPL A-42
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00
View A
57
6
16
89
11
10
4
3
2
1
12
14
13
15
2120
22
17
18
19
A
N2031F03E.EPS
CMPL A-43
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00
12345
67
89
1011121314
1516171819
202122
S9324UKS9511ATS9725VMY9306LB
Below
S9887UKS9888UKS9313UKT9080PXG9311AC
Y9406LKBelow
S9887UKS9888UKS9313UK
T9080PXG9311ACY9406LKT9080PZY9314LB
T9019FFG9307EMT9080QCY9314LBT9019FF
T9080PZY9314LBT9019FF
Power Distribution Board Frame Assembly Printed Board Assembly Relay B.H.Screw,M3�6Main Power Distribution Board Assembly
For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power Supply For 24V DC Power Supply Shaft Washer
B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Main Power Distribution Board AssemblyFor 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
Shaft Washer
B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14
RetainerHex.H.Bolt,M5�16Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14 Retainer
Dummy Plate B.H.Screw,M3�14 Retainer
11111
11
1
11
14111
111
Item Part No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
11111
11
11
111
4
111
11111
11
1
1
4
111
AF
S40
S-H
�1�
*A
FG
40S
-H�
1�*
AF
S40
D-H
41�
*A
FG
40D
-H41
�*
AF
S40
D-H
42�
*A
FG
40D
-H42
�*
Note:*For suffix code details (indicated by �), refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet.N2031PL03E.EPS
CMPL A-44
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00
2
1
3
4N2031F04E.EPS
CMPL A-45
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00
1
2
3
4
Note : * For the composed parts of Models ANB10S and ANB10D details, refer to CMPL 33Q06Q10-31E.
BelowS9881UKS9884UKS9882UKG9307EM
BelowANB10S*ANB10D*G9307EM
1
4
0 to 5
0 to 20
Primary Power Distribution Board Assembly (Rear)For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16
Process I/O Node Unit for ESB busFor SingleFor Dual-Redundant
Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16
Item Part No. DescriptionQty
N2031PL04E.EPS
CMPL A-46
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E
Field Control Processor Card
6th Edition Jan. 2006-00
CTo C
11
8
7To A and B
12
2
1
4
3
A
B
N2031F05E.EPS
6
5
9
10
CMPL A-47
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 6th Edition Jan. 2006-00
1
23
456
789
10— —1112
AIP501AIP502S9628UK
BelowPW301
PW302PW304S9325UKS9400UKY9306LB
T9080LKSB301SB311
A1397WLG9320FJS9073PBCP345T9080LP
V net Coupler AssemblyV net Coupler AssemblyConnector Unit for V netPower Supply Unit
For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply
For 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
Battery AssemblyBattery KitB.H.Screw, M3�6
Dummy PlateESB Bus Interface Master ModuleESB Bus Interface Master Module(with SOE communication function, for Models AFS40D-HE and AFG40D-HE)
Cable Assembly (for SB311)Clamp (not shown, for A1397WL)Band (not shown, for A1397WL)Processor CardDummy Plate
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
2
21
112
11
11
222
212
222
2462
AF
S40
SA
FG
40S
AF
S40
DA
FG
40D
N2031PL05E.EPS
CMPL A-48
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E
Field Control Unit
6th Edition Jan. 2006-00
15
13
12
14
1110
8
9
6
5
7
1
N2031F06E.EPS
12a
CMPL A-49
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 6th Edition Jan. 2006-00
15678
9101112
12a
13
14
15
AIP601T9080KWY9406LBY9406LBS9612AT
S9528VKT9080JQY9306LBT9080MMS9039FA
AIP532
AIP532T9080MK
AIP532
21121
9111
1
1
1
Fan Unit AssemblyDummy PlateB.H.Screw, M4�6B.H.Screw, M3�6Printed Board Assembly(External Interface Unit)
FuseCoverB.H.Screw, M3�6Dummy PlateRS-422 Unit (for Models AFS40D-HE and AFG40D-HE)
ESB bus Coupler Assembly(for Model AFS40S-H4)ESB bus Coupler AssemblyDummy Plate(for Model AFS40S-H2 and AFG40S-H2)ESB bus Coupler Assembly
21121
91111
1
1
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
AF
S40
SA
FG
40S
AF
S40
DA
FG
40D
N2031PL06E.EPS
CMPL A-50
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N20-31E 6th Edition Jan. 2006-00Printed in Japan
Door Fan Assembly and Accessory Assembly
11
1312
9
7
6
8
5
N2031F07E.EPS
1
10
N2031PL07E.EPS
1567
89
10
111213
AIP601T9070CB
Below
S9441DD
S9442DDY9306LBY9408LK
S9090UG
S9361UKS9528VKT9070CB
4221
44
1
112
Fan Unit AssemblyAir FilterFan Frame Assembly
Printed Board AssemblyFor Front Door
For Rear DoorB.H.Screw,M3�6
B.H.Screw with Toothed Lockwasher, M4�8Temperature Sensor Assembly(with front door)
Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty
CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CustomerMaintenanceParts List
CMPL A-51
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Models AFF50S and AFF50DField Control Unit(for FIO, 19-inch Rack Mountable)
CMPL 33Q06N30-31E
CMPL 33Q06N30-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2003(YK)4th Edition : Dec. 2007(YK)
N3031F01E.EPS
1
Field Control UnitDuplexed Field Control Unit
1 AFF50SAFF50D
��
Item Model DescriptionQty
N3031PL01E.EPS
CMPL A-52
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N30-31E 4th Edition Dec.2007-00
N3031F02E.EPS
16
14
9
5
6
410
8
192220
21
18
To A
To B
To C
To D
To A
2324
24 23
2512
11
7
13
15
17
3
2
1
D
C
B
29
26
28
Accessory
A
27
CMPL A-53
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06N30-31E
*1 : Basic type
*2 : With ISA Standard G3 option
1
234
5678
9101112
13
1415
16
1718
19
20212223
242526272829
S9100FAS9148FAT9082QEY9306LBCP401-10
CP401-11T9083CBS9129FAS9343UVCP401-10
CP401-11T9083CBS9129FAS9343UVT9083LY
BelowPW481-10PW482-10PW484-10
BelowPW481-11PW482-11PW484-11
T9088MEBelow
PW481-10PW482-10PW484-10
BelowPW481-11PW482-11PW484-11T9088ME
ADCV02Below
S9103FAS9113FAS9114FA
BelowS9151FAS9152FAS9153FAY9322LB
Y9301WLG9311AAS9528VKAIP504-10AIP504-11
S9112BLT9022RAT9022RTS9049PMT9070UQA1054JA
1
141
112
1
1
1
11
2
2212
211842
1
141
1121
112
1
11
1
1
2
2212
21184
114
1112
1
1
1
1
1
2
221
2
211842
114
1112
1112
1
1
1
1
1
2
221
2
21184
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionM
odel
Qty
AF
F50
S*1
AF
F50
D*1
AF
F50
S*2
AF
F50
D*2
N3031PL02E.EPS
CPU Node UnitCPU Node Unit
Cable TrayB.H.Screw, M3�6Processor Module
Processor ModuleCoverBattery Kit
Cable AssemblyProcessor Module
Processor Module CoverBattery Kit
Cable AssemblyDummy Cover
Power Supply Modulefor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply for 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply for 24 V DC Power Supply
Power Supply Modulefor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply for 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply for 24 V DC Power Supply
CoverPower Supply Modulefor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply for 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply for 24 V DC Power Supply
Power Supply Modulefor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supply for 220 to 240 V AC Power Supply for 24 V DC Power Supply Cover
Dummy CoverCPU Node External Inferface Unitfor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supplyfor 220 to 240 V AC Power Supplyfor 24 V DC Power Supply
CPU Node External Inferface Unitfor 100 to 120 V AC Power Supplyfor 220 to 240 V AC Power Supplyfor 24 V DC Power SupplyB.H.Screw, M3�22
Toothed Lock WasherWasherFuse (1.6A)
V net Coupler Unit V net Coupler Unit
V net Connector UnitLabel (BUS1)Label (BUS2)Insulating Bush(accessory)Cover (for V net cable, accessory)Dust Cover
4th Edition Dec.2007-00Printed in JapanSubject to change without notice.
Blank Page
<B1. Cabinet> B1-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
B1. CabinetIn part B, the CENTUM CS3000 input and output extension cabinets are explained.
• ACB21 I/O Expansion Cabinet (CS 3000 RIO)
• ACB41 I/O Expansion Cabinet (CS 3000 FIO)
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
Blank Page
<B2. *** This section is blank. ***> B2-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
B2. *** This section is blank. ***
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
Blank Page
<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41The ACB21/ACB41 is a cabinet for installing node interface units (NIUs), rack mount-able nodes, rack mountable nodes with an I/O expansion rack, and I/O units of aCENTUM CS 3000 system. An ACB21/ACB41 can be installed side-by-side with afield control station (KFCS2/KFCS, LFCS2/LFCS with cabinet) as well as indepen-dently.
SEE ALSO
• For more information I/O equipment, see the following:
“Input & Output Modules”, in (IM 33Y06K01-01E)
• For more information Field Control Station (KFCS2/KFCS, LFCS2/LFCS with cabinet), see the follow-ing :
“Part A Field Control Station”
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
B3-2<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
B3.1 Installation of Node Inside ACB21/ACB41This section describes how the nodes are installed in the ACB21/ACB41.
■ Installation : KFCS2/KFCS, LFCS2/LFCS £In an ACB21, up to three nodes can be installed on each of the front and rear sides, andrack mountable nodes can also be installed.
In an ACB41, up to four node units for FIO can be installed on each of the front and rearsides, and rack mountable nodes can also be installed.
The figure below shows how those nodes are installed in ACB21/ACB41.
Front RearACB21-S1 ACB21-S2 ACB21-S3
Front Rear Front Rear
B030101E.EPS
Node Rack mountable node
Front RearACB41-S1
Node for FIONode for FIONode for FIO
Node for FIO
Node for FIONode for FIONode for FIO
Node for FIO
ACB4-S1
Front Rear
FFCS
FFCS
FFCS
FFCS
ACB41-S1
Front Rear
FFCS
Node for FIONode for FIO
Node for FIO
19-inch rackequipment mounting
Figure Installation of Nodes in ACB41/ACB21 : KFCS2/KFCS, FFCS, LFCS2/LFCS £
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-3
IM 33Q06C20-01E
B3.2 Installation and Wiring for ACB21/ACB41This section describes the maintenance area, installation, and wiring of the ACB21/ACB41.
CAUTION
With nodes installed, an ACB21/ACB41 weighs nearly 400 kgf. Allow enough workspacefor installation, and carry out the installation with more than one person while ensuringsafety.
SEE ALSO
For more information about installation, see the following:
CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance, TI 33Q01J10-01E, for the installation procedure.
11th Edition : Dec.26,2006-00
B3-4<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
B3.2.1 ACB21/ACB41 Maintenance AreaInstallation of the ACB21/ACB41 requires a maintenance area for maintenance. Thissection describes the maintenance area.
■ Maintenance Area for ACB21/ACB41 £When determining the installation location of an ACB21/ACB41, make sure that there issufficient maintenance area around the ACB21/ACB41 for the following reasons:
• Required for normal operation.
• Required for air suction and exhaust of cooling fans.
• Required for periodic maintenance to maintain stable operation of equipment.
• Required for servicing in case of equipment failure.
The figure below shows the maintenance area required around an ACB21/ACB41 wheninstalled. Secure this area.
F
Tolerance 2 4 6 8
L 600 1200 1800 2400
Number of ACB21/ACB41s Installed Side-by-side 1 2 3 4
Width
Note: ACB21/ACB41s can be installed side-by-side.
B030201E.EPS
1000
650
L+50
800
1000
Unit: mm
Figure Maintenance Area for ACB21/ACB41 £
8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-5
IM 33Q06C20-01E
B3.2.2 Installing an ACB21/ACB41This section describes the installation of the ACB21/ACB41.
■ Installation £1. First, confirm that the following item and works are completed by the user or contrac-
tor as per the drawings:
• Anchor bolts
• Installation rack
• Openings for wiring on the floor
Be extremely careful about the fitting between the anchor bolt holes of the channel baseand the positions of the anchor bolts.
2. Install the ACB21/ACB41 as specified in the equipment arrangement drawing.
3. Avoid physical shock and do not use a crowbar or the like.
SEE ALSO
For more information about installation, see the CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance “TI 33Q01J10-01E.”
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
B3-6<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>
IM 33Q06C20-01E 8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
B3.2.3 Wiring for ACB21/ACB41This section describes the connection of the power supply cable and groundingcable to the ACB21/ACB41.
■ Connecting the Power Supply Cable to ACB21/ACB41 £The figure below shows the power supply wiring for an ACB21/ACB41. Power distributionboard is not provided for ACB21-S3000 and ACB41-S3000.
Grounding Bar for Connecting the Grounding Wire (not insulated from cabinet)
Power distribution board (For dual-line power supplies)
Power supply (terminal screws: M6)
Power supply (terminal screws: M6)
The dual-line power supplies are only provided for the cabinet with duplexed NIU, duplexed Nodes or duplexed field control units.
TM1 L N NTM1 L
B030202E.EPS
Front
Connection of Grounding Wire Connections of Power Supply and READY Contact Output
Grounding Bar for Shield Wires(isolated from the cabinet)
Terminal for Grounding Wire: M8 hexagon bolt
Junction terminals: M5 screws
Grounding bus
Figure Power Supply Wiring for ACB21/ACB41 £
<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-7
IM 33Q06C20-01E 8th Edition : Dec.18,2003-00
● Connections £
Lead the power supply cable into the cabinet through a round hole of a seven-piece bottomplate; the power supply input terminals on the power distribution board are directly abovethe hole. This is the same for dual-line power supplies.
CAUTION
• Wire the power cable through the conduit at the desk entrance for the following rea-sons:
• To prevent damage to the cable due to contact with a metal plate.
• To avoid applying excessive weight on the solderless lugs or power connectionterminals due to the weight of the cable.
• Turn off the main power supply, and perform work after confirming with a tester thatthere is no power in the power cable to be connected.
• After the power cable has been connected, turn on the power to the power cable withthe breaker in the power panel turned OFF. Then, confirm with a tester that normalpower is being supplied to the power connection terminal.
• Wire the power cable so that a distance of 1 cm or more is maintained from othersignal lines.
1. For the power cable, an 8 mm2 cable or thicker is recommended.
2. Provide terminal treatment for the end of the cable, and crimp a ring-tongue crimp-onlug (for an M6 screw) onto each wire.
3. Detach the protection cover for the terminal strip TM1 on the power distribution board.
4. Connect the non-grounded side of the power supply wires to terminal L, and thegrounded side to N.
5. After connecting the power cable, turn on the power supply to the cabinet while leav-ing the circuit breaker on the power distribution board OFF. Then, use a circuit tester tocheck that the power is supplied at the power supply terminals.
6. Replace the protection cover.
This completes the power supply wiring.
B3-8<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Connecting the Grounding Cable to ACB21/ACB41Be sure to ground the equipment in order to avoid the electric shock of the operator andmaintenance engineers and to prevent the influence of external noise.
The grounding bar is shown on the page before the preceding one.
CAUTION
When grounding the cabinet, connect the grounding cable to the designated protectivegrounding terminal.
1. The grounding resistance must be 100 ohm or less. Do not share the grounding withequipment of other systems.
2. For the grounding bus, use a 22 mm2 cable or thicker.
3. The grounding bar for connecting grounding wires is at the bottom front of the cabinetand is not isolated from the cabinet casing.
4. Ground the equipment inside the cabinet to the junction terminals (M5 screws) on thegrounding bar.
SEE ALSO
For more information about installation, see the CENTUM CS 3000 Installation Guidance “TI 33Q01J10-01E.”
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-9
IM 33Q06C20-01E
■ Wiring for Contact Outputs of ACB41This section describes the wiring between the contact outputs of ACB41 and the house-keeping unit (hereinafter referred to as HKU). The terminal board of the contact outputs isplaced at the lower part of the cabinet. The diagnosis signals of the internal temperature ofthe cabinet and the fans are sent to the CPU though the HKU and the connected FIOmodules. To enable the housekeeping capability, the corresponding software application isrequired.
CAUTION
• All equipment connected to a contact output, including the signal wires, junctionterminals, relays, and power supply unit, should comply with CSA1010 or CSA950 (fora 100-120 V AC power supply), or EN61010-1 (for a 220-240 V AC power supply).
• When performing wiring for the READY output terminals, attach the clamp filter (partNo. A1193MN, included in accessories) near the terminals.
• The cable connected to the READY (processor status contact output) terminals shouldrun at least 1 cm from other signal cables since a high voltage is applied to it.
The figure below shows the terminal board of the contact outputs and HKU.
B030203E.EPS
HKUContact outputsPower distribution board (Front) Power distribution board (Rear)
ACB41 (Front) ACB41 (Rear)
Figure The Contact Output Terminal and HKU £
9th Edition : Oct.28,2004-00
B3-10<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41>
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● Contact Output Wiring £
Make sure of the following when using the contact output:
• Avoid applying an AC voltage directly to the contact output terminal. Use a voltageless than the rated.
• When this contact directly drives an external relay or the like, use a spark killer toprotect the relay contact.
The figures below show the contact output terminals of an ACB41 cabinet and an exampleof using a spark killer.
B030204E.EPS
READY
RL1
NO NC C
CN1(REARD-FAN)FUSE
CN2(FRONTD-FAN)
D1
D2
RDYRL1
FRONTD-FAN
D3
D4
REARD-FAN
Contact output terminal
Figure Contact Output Terminal £
B030205E.EPS
Contact Contact
Powersupply
Powersupply
Inductive loard such as solenoid valve
Inductiveload
Contact Protection by CR Circuit
External circuitDCS
Contact Protection by Diode
Figure Use of Spark Killer £
Under the following circumstances, the contact is triggered, i.e., changes from Open toClose state.
• HKU abnormal.
• Fan alarm occurs.
• Temperature alarm occurs
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
<B3. Overview of ACB21/ACB41> B3-11
IM 33Q06C20-01E
● HKU Features £
The Open or Close states of the contacts are indicated by the HKU status lamps (LED).
• RDY : Unlit if HKU shows an error
• FAN ALARM : Lit if the lamp encounters an error
• TEMP ALARM : Lit if cabinet temperature is abnormal
Specification of HKU Contacts :
• Rated Voltage : 250V AC. 30V DC
• Rated Current : 2A
• Rated Load : 125VA
RDY
FAN ALARM
TEMP ALARM
FRONTD-FAN
D1
D2
D4
D3REARD-FAN
AIR IN
AIR OUT
B030206E.EPS
RDY lamp
FRONT D-FAN (D1, D2)Lamps for the fans on the front door
REAR D-FAN (D3, D4)Lamps for the fans on the back door
TEMP ALARMLamps for the cabinet internal temperature
Figure Status Lamps of HKU £
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
Blank Page
CustomerMaintenanceParts List
CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CMPL B-1
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CMPL 33Y06K50-31E
CMPL 33Y06K50-31E1st Edition : Dec. 2003(YK)3rd Edition : Mar. 2005(YK)
Terminal BoardsTerminal BlocksRelay Boards
Terminal Blocks
3
4
2
1
To Cabinet or Rack
To Cabinet or Rack
5
6
7
8
To Cabinet or Rack
To Cabinet or Rack
K5031F01E.EPS
TE16T9041RYTE32T9041RZTETC
T9041RYTERTT9041RZ
–1–1–
1–1
16-point Terminal BlockCover
32-point Terminal BlockCover
Terminal Block for Thermocouple
CoverTerminal Block for RTS
Cover
Item Model DescriptionQty
12345
678
K5031PL01E.EPS
CMPL B-2
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 1st Edition Dec.2003-00
General-Purpose terminal Board(Connector Type, for Digital Input Module)
3
4
4
To Cabinet or Rack
1
2
2
To Cabinet or Rack
8
9
9
To Cabinet or Rack
10
11
11
To Cabinetor Rack
5
To Cabinet or Rack
67
K5031F02E.EPS
CMPL B-3
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 1st Edition Dec.2003-00
MUB
T9041RYMUD
T9041RZMCMY9305LBT9041RDMTC
T9041RYMRTT9041RZ
–
2–
2–21–
2–2
General-purpose Terminal Board(16 point board�2)
CoverGeneral-purpose Terminal Board(32 point board�2, : for ST5, ST6 and ST7)
CoverTerminal Board for Control I/O
B.H.Screw, M3�5Cover
Terminal Board for Thermocouple
CoverTerminal Board for RTD
Cover
Item Model DescriptionQty
1
23
45678
91011
K5031PL02E.EPS
CMPL B-4
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 1st Edition Dec.2003-00
MRI Relay Input Board
10
8
1
2
3
4
To Cabinetor Rack
K5031F03E.EPS
10
8
1 2
5
7
67
5
5
7
7
To Cabinetor Rack
K5031F04E.EPS
CMPL B-5
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 3rd Edition Mar.2005-00
12345
6789
10
A1725MRA1330EFS9430VKS9431VKS9380VK
S9381VKY9304LBT9056HYT9056HVY9314LB
16111
1
2
Relay (24V)Fuse (1.6A)Terminal CoverTerminal CoverTerminal Cover
Terminal CoverB. H. Screw, M3�4BracketBracketB. H. Screw, M3�14
16131
1
2
Item Part No. Description
Mod
el
Qty
16131
1
2
321
1
14
12
321
3
18
12
321
3
18
12
MR
I-11
4
MR
I-12
4
MR
I-13
4
MR
I-21
4
MR
I-22
4
MR
I-23
4
K5031PL03E.EPS
CMPL B-6
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E
MRO Relay Output Board
1st Edition Dec.2003-00
1
2 4
3
7
9
11
To Cabinet or Rack
K5031F05E.EPS
1
2
5
6
8
8
7
10
11
K5031F06E.EPS
To Cabinet or Rack
CMPL B-7
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2003, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Y06K50-31E 3rd Edition Mar.2005-00Printed in Japan
1
23
45678
91011
S9165VMS9162VMS9163VMA1330EFS9430VK
S9431VKS9380VKS9381VKA1329EFY9304LB
T9056HQT9056HRY9314LB
16
11
1
1
2
Relay (24V)Relay (24V)Relay (24V)Fuse (1.6A)Terminal Cover
Terminal CoverTerminal CoverTerminal CoverFuse (1.0A)B. H. Screw, M3�4
BracketBracketB. H. Screw, M3�14
16
13
1
1
2
Item Part No. Description
Mod
el
Qty
1613
1
1
2
16
1
2
16
1
2
16
1
2
16
1
2
16
12
2
32
1
2
32
1
11
4
12
32
1
31
8
12
321
31
8
12
32
1
2644
12
32
1
2644
12
32
1
22
648
12
MR
O-1
14
MR
O-1
24
MR
O-1
34
MR
O-1
44
MR
O-1
54
MR
O-1
64
MR
O-2
14
MR
O-2
24
MR
O-2
34
MR
O-2
44
MR
O-2
54
MR
O-2
64
K5031PL04E.EPS
Blank Page
CAUTIONThe Customer Maintenance Parts List (CMPL) is provided as reference for ordering maintenance Parts. Customer should notassemble or disassemble the products by himself using this CMPL, but to contact to Yokogawa’s sales agents for partsreplacement. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for damages caused through disassembly or assembly.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CustomerMaintenanceParts List
CMPL B-9
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
Model ACB41Input/Output Expansion Cabinet(for FIO)
CMPL 33Q06P10-31E
CMPL 33Q06P10-31E1st Edition : Sep. 2001(YK)7th Edition : Jun. 2007(YK)
1
2
2P1031F01E.EPS
1
2�
Note : *1 For suffix code details, refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheets. *2 Not included in Model ACB41 (separately order). 2 Panels are necessary when attaching to both sides.
BelowACB41-S1��0*1
ACB41-S2��0*1
ACB41-S30000
ACB2P*2
IM 33Y06K01-90E
1
1or 21
Cabinet UnitFront/Rear : For Node Unit MountingWith Power Distribution Board Unit
Front : For Node Unit. Rear : For 19-inch Rack Equipment MountingWith Power Distribution Board Unit
Front/Rear : For 19-inch Rack Equipmen MountingWithout Power Distribution Board Unit
Side Panel (option)Explosion Protection Manual
Item Model or Part No. DescriptionQty
P1031PL01E.EPS
CMPL B-10
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06P10-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00
View A
810
9
19
1112
14
13
7
56
4
3
15
17
16
18
20
21
22
A
23
24
24
26
25
28
27
P1031F02J.EPS
2
1
CMPL B-11
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06P10-31E 4th Edition Dec.2003-00
1
2
34567
8
9
101112
13141516
1718192021
222324
25
262728
BelowS9881UKS9884UKS9882UKG9307EM
S9904UKS9691DAS9725VMS9528VKY9306LB
BelowS9887UKS9888UKS9313UKT9080PX
G9311ACY9406LK
BelowS9887UKS9888UK
S9313UKT9080PXG9311ACY9406LKT9080PZ
Y9314LBT9019FFG9307EMT9080QCY9314LB
T9019FFS9594UK
BelowS9422UKS9423UK
�
G9307EMT9082EYG9307EM
Primary Power Distribution Board Assembly (Front and Rear)For 100 to 120V AC Power Supply For 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
Hex. H. Bolt, M5�16
Power Distribution Board Frame AssemblyPrinted Board Assembly
RelayFuse
B.H.Screw,M3�6
Main Power Distribution Board AssemblyFor 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
Shaft
WasherB.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Main Power Distribution Board Assembly
For 100 to 120V AC Power SupplyFor 220 to 240V AC Power Supply
For 24V DC Power SupplyShaftWasher
B.H.Screw with Toothed Lock washer,M4�6Dummy Plate
B.H.Screw,M3�14Retainer
Hex.H.Bolt,M5�16Dummy Plate
B.H.Screw,M3�14
RetainerHouse Keeping UnitPower Supply Unit
For 100 to 120V AC and 220 to 240V AC Power SupplyFor 24V DC Power Supply
Models ANB10S, ANB10D, ANS10S, ANS10D, AFF30S, AFF30D, AFF50S or AFF50D (option)*2
BoltDummy Plate (as required)Bolt
2
4
11151
1
1
11
1
11411
112
�
4�4
Item Part No. Description
Mod
el
Qty
2
4
11151
1
1
111
111
4
1
�
4�4
1
4
11151
1
1
11
1
11411
112
�
4�4
1
4
11151
1
1
111
111
4
12
�
4�4
AC
B41
-S11
*1
AC
B41
-S12
*1
AC
B41
-S21
*1
AC
B41
-S22
*1
Note : *1 ; For suffix code details, refer to YOKOGAWA GS sheet. *2 ; Models ANB10S and ANB10D see CMPL 33Q06Q10-31 *2 ; Models ANR10S and ANR10D see CMPL 33Q06Q10-32 *2 ; Models AFF30S and AFF30D see CMPL 33Q06N01-31 *2 ; Models AFF50S and AFF50D see CMPL 33Q06N30-31
P1031PL02E.EPS
CMPL B-12
All Rights Reserved. Copyright © 2001, Yokogawa Electric Corporation CMPL 33Q06P10-31E 6th Edition Jan. 2006-00Printed in Japan
Door Fan Assembly and Accessory Assembly
11
1312
9
7
6
8
5
P1031F03E.EPS
1
10
P1031PL03E.EPS
1567
89
10
111213
AIP601T9070CB
�Below
S9441DD
S9442DDY9306LBY9408LK
S9090UG
S9362UKS9528VKT9070CB
4221
44
1
112
Fan Unit AssemblyAir FilterFan Frame Assembly
Printed Board AssemblyFor Front Door
For Rear DoorB.H.Screw,M3�6
B.H.Screw with Toothed Lockwasher, M4�8Temperature Sensor Assembly(with front door)
Accessory AssemblyFuseAir Filter
ItemModel orPart No. DescriptionQty
Ind-1
IM 33Q06C20-01E
CS 1000/CS 3000Field Control Stations
INDEX
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition
AACB21/ACB41 Maintenance Area ................... B3-4Attaching the Brackets on a Nest ..................... A3-5Attaching the Clamp Filters ............................ A4-21
BBattery Unit
FCU .......................................................... A6-20FFCS ........................................................ A6-44PFCS/SFCS ............................................... A6-5Replacement Procedure ........................... A7-19
Bus Cable ConnectionKFCS2/KFCS ........................................... A4-36LFCS2/LFCS ............................................ A4-16PFCS........................................................ A4-10SFCS........................................................ A4-10
CCable Connections .......................................... A4-1Check of Status Indication Lamps
LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ...................... A7-8PFCS/SFCS ............................................... A7-6
Common Procedure for ReplacingCards and Units ................................... A7-24
Configuration ofFCS and Name of Each Part ....................... A2-1FFCS and Name of Each Part ................... A2-13KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet ......................... A2-9LFCS2/LFCS with Cabinet .......................... A2-4PFCS/SFCS ............................................... A2-2Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS ................... A2-8Rack Mountable LFCS2/LFCS .................... A2-3
ConnectingBus Cables ................................................. A4-9Bus Cables to FFCS ................................. A4-42Bus Cables to KFCS2/KFCS..................... A4-35Bus Cables to LFCS2/LFCS ..................... A4-15Cable to Contact Output ............................ A4-50ER Bus Cable : FFCS .............................. A4-48ER Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS ................. A4-39
ESB Bus Cable : FFCS ............................ A4-47ESB Bus Cables : KFCS2/KFCS.............. A4-37PFCS/SFCS Bus Cable ............................ A4-10RIO Bus Cables ........................................ A4-27V net Cable : FFCS ................................... A4-43
Connection Between V Net Cableand VL Net Cable ................................. A4-11
Contact Output Unit ....................................... A6-33Control Bus Coupler Unit ............................... A6-10Control Bus Coupler Unit
Replacement Procedure ...................... A7-17Control Station Overview ................................. A1-1
DDaily Maintenance ........................................... A7-4
EER Bus
Interface Master Module (EB401) ............. A6-53Interface Slave Module (EB501) ................ A6-54
ESB BusCoupler Module : FFCS ............................ A6-50Coupler Unit : KFCS2/KFCS ..................... A6-30Interface Card : KFCS2/KFCS .................. A6-26Interface Module (SB401) : FFCS ............. A6-51Interface Master Module (with SOE) ......... A6-35
ExchangeBus Cables : FFCS ................................... A7-43Node : FFCS ............................................. A7-53
External Interface UnitFFCS ........................................................ A6-41LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS
with Cabinet ................................... A6-32Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS,
LFCS2/LFCS .................................. A6-31
FFan Units
LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS .................... A6-34Functions of Each Unit in PFCS/SFCS............. A6-2
Ind-2
IM 33Q06C20-01E 13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
GGrounding ........................................................ A4-6Grounding the RIO Bus .................................. A4-34Grounding the V net ....................................... A4-24
HHow to Replace Parts .................................... A7-57
IInspection by FFCS
Status Display LEDs ................................. A7-11Status Display Window ............................. A7-10
Inspection Using FCS Status DisplayWindow ................................................. A7-5
InstallationNode Inside ACB21/ACB41 ........................ B3-2Wiring : ACB21/ACB41 ............................... B3-3Installation .................................................. A3-1
InstallingACB21/ACB41............................................ B3-5Connector Assembly : PFCS/SFCS .......... A4-14I/O Extension Rack : PFCS/SFCS .............. A3-9LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS
(with Cabinet) ................................. A3-10Rack Mountable Device .............................. A3-7
IRIG-B Coupler .............................................. A6-39
MMaintenance Area.......................................... A3-11Maintenance of FCS ........................................ A7-1Mounting a Rack Mountable Type Devices ...... A3-2
OOperations and Setups .................................... A5-1Overview of ACB21/ACB41.............................. B3-1
PParts Requiring Periodic Replacement :
FFCS................................................... A7-56Parts Requiring Periodic Replacement :
LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ............... A7-30Parts Requiring Periodic Replacement :
PFCS/SFC .......................................... A7-22Power Distribution Board
LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS with Cabinet ................................... A6-13
PFCS/SFCS ............................................... A6-3Rack Mountable KFCS2/KFCS,
LFCS2/LFCS .................................. A6-12Power Supply Module : FFCS ........................ A6-42
Power Supply Unit of PFCS/SFCS ................... A6-4Power Supply Unit Replacement
Procedure : PFCS/SFC ....................... A7-13Power Supply Wiring........................................ A4-2Power Unit in FCU : LFCS2/LFCS,
KFCS2/KFCS ...................................... A6-19Precautions for Maintenance ........................... A7-2Precautions for Static Electricity ....................... A7-3Processor Card in FCU .................................. A6-21Processor Card of PFCS/SFCS ....................... A6-6Processor Card Replacement
Procedure : PFCS/SFCS ..................... A7-15Processor Module : FFCS .............................. A6-43
RReplacing
Air Filter : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS..... A7-32Battery ...................................................... A7-59Battery Pack : LFCS2/LFCS,
KFCS2/KFCS ................................. A7-39Battery Unit : PFCS/SFCS ........................ A7-20Cards or Units in Duplexed
LFCS2/LFCS,KFCS2/KFCS ........... A7-27Cards or Units in Non-Redundant
LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFC ............ A7-25Common Modules : FFCS......................... A7-43ER Bus Interface Master Module : FFCS ... A7-50ER Bus Interface Slave Module : FFCS ..... A7-51ESB Bus Coupler Module : FFCS ............. A7-48ESB Bus Interface Module : FFCS ............ A7-49Fan Unit : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS .... A7-34Fuses : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ........ A7-38LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS Parts ........... A7-23PFCS/SFCS Parts .................................... A7-12Processor Module : FFCS ......................... A7-46Relay : LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS ........ A7-41V net Coupler Unit : FFCS......................... A7-52
RIO BusCoupler Unit : LFCS2/LFCS ...................... A6-29Distribution Unit : LFCS2/LFCS ................. A6-18Interface Card : LFCS2/LFCS ................... A6-25
SSetting
Setting Up Units : PFCS/SFCS ................... A5-2the Domain Number : FFCS ...................... A6-47the Domain Number : LFCS2/LFCS,
KFCS2/KFCS ................................. A6-23the Domain Number : PFCS/SFCS ............. A6-8the Station Number : FFCS ....................... A6-48the Station Number :
KFCS2/KFCS, LFCS2/LFC ............ A6-24
Ind-3
IM 33Q06C20-01E
the Station Number : PFCS/SFCS .............. A6-9IP Address : KFCS2/KFCS ....................... A6-37
TTuring On/Off the Power ................................... A5-5
UUsing the Control bus Converter Unit :
FFCS ................................................... A4-46
VV net
Conversion ............................................... A4-49Coupler Unit : FFCS .................................. A6-49Coupler Unit :
LFCS2/LFCS, KFCS2/KFCS .......... A6-27
WWiring
the Control Bus : PFCS/SFCS .................. A4-12V net Coupler Cable : FFCS ...................... A4-45ACB21/ACB41............................................ B3-6
13th Edition : Dec.10,2007-00
Blank Page